Home

RDR-HX820/HX825 - Super TV Servis M+S

Contents

1. IDE A3 CS1 3 DASP C wfo R124 R126 RD 064 BOARD 1 8 p LS M24C32 WMNGT B RISM3 lt lt XSYSRST gt T0 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 TDI REF NO 20000SERIES TDI 22 m TMS 22 TRST 4444446 b 2 NO MARK REC PB MODE oni xu
2. 3 TU_AFT TU_G_MAX lt TU AUTOP 24 ro 8 4 AV 106 BOARD 5 8 lt lt TU de A gt gt gt TU PCONT IT CONTROLLER 2 gt gt INE 5 TU_PCONT gt ol 5 amp CN602 15P REF NO 10 000 SERIES lt 2 d 9 Jj 5 gt aga 54 DRE 1 IT GND oi gt gt g 4 4 R674 ew 4 E FL Pow ev MDIMMER 160 4 LED DIM NO MARK REC PB MODE R1627 C629 JL671 0 5 5v A Ro 1684 0 JL673 P PB MODE 5656 16V 100k 6 SIRCS B C625 B f 0628 0630 gt gt 1 sincs sv 19 PS602 01 HX820 FLD DATA R687 0 JL674 257 5 7 5 7 D HOA 18V 10V 10 e LED DT BOARD LED R688 0 1675 CN3003 dn 10k 0616 NEEDS M LED CK FAR 005 FFC 50 2581197 146 JL611 LED_STB R965 0 677 SEE PAGE 4 24 FRO SWITCH egos R696 JLGZ8 P ST 5 FLD_STB 2o 12 FLD_STB 21633 679 e 13 0 1 5 5 1 2280 5 1 8 2 44 A 15 KEY2 mU 22
3. 5 RD 064 BOARD 4 8 D lt TDI FLASH ROM DBI X DBI REF NO 20 000 SERIES MARK REC PB MODE EEEE lt lt Voltage measurement of the CSP IC HOSTO and the Transistors with mark is not possible 27 HDATA U X B HpATAI2 N HDATA S X HDATA 3 ________ lt HDATAIA 5 X 5 6 NHDATAT7 lt lt 7 HDATA 8 alk M 8 KZ HDATA 8 E pe BEATA 9 REN N HDATA 10 X HDATA 10 1 HDATA 11 N HDATA 12 HDATA 12 502 HDATA 13 N HDATA 14 HDATA 14 128Mbit FLASH MEMORY HDATA 15 ZZ HDATA 15 AW gt gt TCK D R535 5600 SD TRST R532 5600 TET lt lt HADRS 30 C506 S29GL128N90TFIR20 0 1u B mu ie lt lt HADRS 29 HCS 0 AN e amp lt lt HADRS 28 O Gus TY lt lt HADRS 27 JL531 we 3 0 3 lt lt HADRS 26 HDATA 15 Bra 0 lt lt HADRS 25 7 6 lt lt HADRS 24 HDATA 14 4 lt lt HADRS 23 6 21 lt lt HADRS 13 HDATA 13 lt lt HADRS 12 HDATA 5 HDATA 12 F HDATA 4 lt lt HADRS 9 0 0 R549 34 JL532 HDATA 11 B WE lt lt N
4. aeeoo pe bz ke la bz ke ke ke hz p 3 ee 34 33 AEMSN ShEMSNR NEMSNN EMSNN AEMSN EMSNN 16h9MSNN ASM ASM ASM ASMS N9MSNN AQMSNN N9MSNN 2 2 12 BOARD BOARD A9MSNn 15 XH gt lt vid 11024 90051 GLSHLI 910511 0 WSIH 4 1 9 6 0 1 E E SNIS LI IOSLH WSIH 4 5 179 501 15 WSIH TSNIVIS 5 EP Sy 108 1i 5 R _ ISL 5 g 5 a lele 211818 2 S 500 15 1 291415 WSIE E E gt a 5 m 5 2 5 5 5 5 m 5 gt Su 5 a lt A d p 10900 88 5 933 10 3 i5 lt lt lt lt 8 8 5 5 2 2 2 a 5 a 5 5 a a 5 25 a a LINN GND GND IDE W GND IDE R IDE IN IDE HD16 IDE A1 DE D7 DE D8 DE D6 DE D9 DE D5 DE D10 IDE A0 IDE A2
5. select the IN point using lt lt 4 gt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if the IN point is correct If the IN point is incorrect select the IN point using 11 1 and press ENTER The display for setting the OUT point end of the scene appears 6 Select the OUT point using lt lt gt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses 1 Press ENTER if the OUT point is correct If the OUT point is incorrect select the OUT point using and press ENTER The selected scene is added to the scene information block add more scenes go to step 4 Recording an Entire DV Format Tape One Touch Dubbing HDD You can record the entire contents of a DV Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single press of the ONE TOUCH DUB button on the recorder The recorder controls the digital video camera for the whole process and completes the recording How chapters are created The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD become a single title When Chapter is set to in the Recording setup this title is divided into chapters When dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode each shooting session on the tape becomes a chapter on the disc For other discs the recorder divides the title into chapters at approximately 6 minute intervals Follow steps 1 to 6 of Preparing for DV dubbing on page 91
6. 0801 2 A JTE lt lt 6 lt 6 lt 303050 lt lt SWITCH ASW6 STZ6 8N T146 STZ6 8N T146 zi9 lt 7 3 4 9 gt gt R C_OUT_to_L1 UNSW 8V V 20X gt mS TU_CVBS 2200 2 FB818 FS1 5 6 ASWS 2 Q807 C804 a RJKOO5N03 T146 UDZSTE 175 68 0828 RKS DZSTE 176 2B z 10V gt 5 D824 ae El 5 212 _ 5 LINE3 gt B STZ6 8N T146 2 lt S EE gt DECODER 3 gt UNSWGV A 2 o 5 8 TO 1 8 gt gt gt x S ol alo 5 3 3 3 2 o LINE1 TV G 5 SE GND V S S 2 518l 5 jmucosx maca C866 C865 3 S15 2 lt 8 2 26 amp 2 565 alo a S gt 5 25V e se e 5 GZ D821 7 FB808 NNCD3 9F T1 OuH FB809 H D808 4 0 STZ6 8N T146 29 Hs U D809 iina TO 2 8 B8 C853 6 8 OuH 100p 50V D816 UDZSTE 176 2B FB812 D817 A UDZSTE 1713B F FB813 C854 BD3826FS UH c 100p 50V TUL 22 STZ6 8N T146 1 3 D825 TORB a gt AUX_R_OUT UDZSTE 176 2B FS_AUX_IN ag A
7. Wed Thu Fri Sat 3 Select the TV guide page number you want to modify and press ENTER Basic TV Guide Page Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat sluawisn py pue sumag Press the number buttons 4 4 to enter the TV guide page number and press ENTER to confirm the setting f you make a mistake re enter the correct number To return to the original settings press d RETURN 5 To set or change another TV guide page number repeat steps 3 and 4 above t Hint To view Teletext information on your TV screen during a broadcast switch to your TV s tuner by pressing TV DVD gt continued 99 100 102 Notes step 4 above enter 000 if you do not want to use the TV guide page number for automatic labelling The recorder will instead store a default title name programme position start time stop time Refer to the Teletext information on your TV screen to obtain the TV guide page number with programme titles and their start times If the Teletext TV guide has a page which always shows the programmes for the current day this page should be input for all days If you start recording more than three minutes before the programme is scheduled to start the correct label information may not be transferred Note that this function may not work c
8. 4 A NN NO Bw M NON HH KH AH W POWER AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT IT CONTROLLER VIDEO IN OUT EURO IN OUT IR CONT 4 46 AV 106 RDR HX820 HX825 FL 166 BOARD SIDE A Uses unleaded solder FL 166 BOARD SIDE A CN3101 B 2 03112 1 103101 A 4 FL 166 BOARD SIDE D3111 1 03101 A 2 03102 A 2 FL DRIVER 2 IN POWER SW 4 48 FL 166 RDR HX820 HX825 Uses unleaded solder FR 257 BOARD SIDE A CN3004 B 4 CN3005 B 5 D3005 7 103002 A 5 FR 257 BOARD SIDE A FR 257 BOARD SIDE B FR 257 BOARD SIDE B IC3001 A 5 D20n414 U Q3001 A4 03002 4 16 1 2 3 4 D 0 REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED FR 257 4 49 4 50 RDR HX820 HX825 Uses unleaded solder nnn X RD 064 BOARD SIDE A nr T CN201 7 0902 2 5 YA 2 000 a CEJ CN701 B 8 IC903 0 3 m RE gt CN901 D 3 907 D 2 T 2 E CN902 0 1 IC908 0 3 o7 ss Pee LIL AT EU m 1909 0 3 2 qu 3 V db anes IC103 C 5 IC910 0 1 BI st 502 MR 00 1105 0 5 jb ges IC106 0 5 0601 4 SDE NC gt IC108 6 0602 C4 A IC109 4 0603 4 IC201 7 0604 C44 ER
9. 4 Select the title you want to include in the Playlist title and press ENTER The display for setting the start point IN appears The title starts to play To return to the beginning of the title press and then press 99 Create a Playlist Set IN point 1 World Sports Preview OK Select 5 Select the IN point using 44 and press ENTER Playback pauses 6 Press ENTER if the IN point is correct If the point is incorrect select the point using and press ENTER The display for setting the end point OUT appears 7 Select the OUT point using 4 4 and press ENTER Playback pauses Dividing a title Divide HDD UNI If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do not want to reduce the picture quality divide the title into two shorter titles Note that dividing a title cannot be undone Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode 1 Press TITLE LIST Press gt to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Divide and press ENTER The display for setting the dividing point appears and the title starts to play To return to the beginning of the title press M and then press Ke Divide 1 World Sports Select a point Cx 4 Select the divi
10. 1 L 1 1 FR 257 BOARD CN3003 SEE PAGE 3 6 3 3 RD 064 1 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM AV 106 BOARD CN502 SEE PAGE 3 4 TO FROM AV 106 BOARD CN501 SEE PAGE 3 4 XSYSRST 1 8 RD 064 BOARD 102 EEPROM SCL 6 SDA 5 CN603 RECVY 0607 23 YIN RECCCR Q606 RECCR 27 gt CIN 0601 COUT AD10 COUT 286 lt p ins AE9 YOUT lt BOUT Mil Y G 0603 GOUT lt 1 GOUT 0605 ROUT CRI AE14 AC14 REC656I0 AD15 AE16 RECCR V 46 VI3A 52 50 REC656I 0 7 AD16 AE17 Y9 REC65617 RECVY V a VI 2A Hs 2 EC656H vs 3 EC656V DATACLK 10 656CLKI VI 1B 800110 CDCLO RECG SDA
11. 1 VO on standby button 25 2 Front panel display 126 Disc tray 33 open close button 33 5 TIMER REC indicator 56 SYNCHRO REC indicator 63 6 play button 66 stop button 66 remote sensor 22 9 REC button 33 REC STOP button 33 Language Code List For details see page 109 The language spellings conform to the ISO 639 1988 E F standard Code Language Code Language 14 1312 11 HDD button indicator 33 DVD button indicator 33 12 DV IN jack 91 13 ONE TOUCH DUB button 93 14 PROGRAM buttons 33 The button has a tactile dot 15 INPUT SELECT button 63 91 REC MODE button 33 LINE 2 IN S VIDEO VIDEO L MONO AUDIO R jacks 29 Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder uoneuuojuj jEuonippy continued 1 25 Code Language Code Language 1027 Afar 1183 Irish 1347 Maori 1507 Samoan 1028 Abkhazian 1186 Scots Gaelic 1349 Macedonian 1508 Shona 1032 Afrikaans 1194 Galician 1350 Malayalam 1509 Somali 1039 Amharic 1196 Guarani 1352 Mongolian 1511 Albanian 1044 Arabic 1203 Gujarati 1353 Moldavian 1512 Serbian 1045 Assamese 1209 Hausa 1356 Marathi 1513 Siswati 1051 Aymara 1217 Hindi 1357 Malay 1514 Sesotho 1052 Azerbaijani 1226 Croatian 1358 Maltese 1515 Sundanese 1053 Bashkir 1229 Hungarian 1363 Burmese 1516 Swedish 1057 Byelorussian 1233 Armenian 1365 Nauru
12. NO SIRCS FLD STB LED DAT LED CK LED STB LED RST LED DIM KEY 0 KEY 1 KEY 2 10 FR 25 BOARD 5V 163002 CN3003 RECIEVER LED DRIVE 53012 53014 DVD HDD OPEN GLOSE CH PLAY STOP INPUT SELECT CH REC MODE REC STOP DUB D3004 53006 53009 REMOTE COMMANDER HDD TIMER REC SYNCHRD REC 53001 53005 CN3001 RDR HX820 HX825 FL 166 0 2 2 1 ND3101 13101 FLD DRIVE NO gt BARRE GO STB 561 7 DIN 5616 8 CLK DDATA 0 31 AE20 AD19 2 AE19 AA18 AC18 AB18 AC19 AB20 AC21 AB21 AA19 AC22 B22 AE21 AD20 DADRSI0 12 DBAIO 1 DDAT 0 15 V25 U22 025 22 024 021 000810 31 DDAT 16 31 DDMI0 3 1 8 256Mbit DDR T21 U23 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 54 56 57 59 60 62 63 65 0015 BA0 1 LDQS UDQS LDM UDM AE24 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 54 56 57 59 60 62 63 65 DQ15 0 1 LDSS UDQ3 LDM UDM 1 105 1 106 22 23 AD23 AC23 H22 H24 C25 E22 E25 F22 24 25 G23 G25 D24 25 A10 A17 B10 B16 0 15 DQ0 DQ15 54 56 31 1 12 15
13. Select a character on the keyboard using Tm and press ENTER To switch between upper case lower case or characters with accents press the yellow button Keyboard repeatedly To cancel entering new keyword press the red button Back Repeat step 4 to enter the keyword Press the green button Save The entered keyword is registered To delete the keyword select the keyword you want to delete and press the red button Delete To change the keyword select the keyword you want to change and press the green button Edit To set a programme for timer recording See One Button Recording GUIDE Plus page 56 Hint When two or more keywords are set for My Choice you can select All 4 5 Select an item using and press ENTER Select a setting using and press ENTER Language Select a language for the on screen displays using Country Select your country region using 44 When you exit the GUIDE Plus system after changing your country region the Setup display appears Follow the instructions for Step 6 Easy Setup page 25 from step 2 Postal Code Enter your postal code using If Country is set to Other you cannot enter a postal code and the GUIDE Plus system will not search for a host channel External Receiver 17 Receiver 27
14. pue sumag 109 pue 111 112 114 Additional Information Troubleshooting If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the recorder use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs Should any problem persist consult your nearest Sony dealer Power The power does not turn on gt Check that the mains lead is connected securely Picture There is no picture gt Re connect all connecting cords securely The connecting cords are damaged gt Check the connection to your TV page 13 Switch the input selector on your such as to so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen Check that Scart Setting in the Video setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system page 103 gt f you connect the recorder to your TV via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks set Component Out of Video Output in the Video setup to On page 102 This recorder cannot record NTSC signals When playing a double layer DVD the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch gt gt Picture noise appears gt If the picture output signal from your recorder passes through your VCR to get to your TV or if you are connected to a combination TV VIDEO player the copy protection sign
15. 0301 CN1 0301 1301 12V REG D304 P301 2A FLASH MEMORY 128Mbit c UNSW3V 2 I f ee DVD 8 UNIT VDEC 3 3V SW5V 3 4 0303 W UNSW 6V mo HOD SW3 AVC 3 UNIT SW5V PROTECT 0000000900000000 0000 4 2 ETE 5V REG P502 3 154 1502 unswev n 7 O 9 10 601 2 me UNSW 8V 060 M 202 1 8V REG 201 HDD DRIVE 5 VIN vour 4 VR501 Ke SHUNT REGULATOR IC803 L I I I I I 5 i L AUDIO ADC DAC L TU401 L 71 AV 106 BOARD MM 3 1405 wiswiav CN101 Bus 2 1 401 1 2 TU5V REG TU30V REG swsv_ 1 LOGIC UNSW6V 4 2 o 1 8 REG I 9 _UNSWAV 10 i D 5 TU PCONT Em UNSW 8V PCONT 15 i L 1401 202 203 i xar EURO MSP LINE OUT AUDIO AMP 3 REG UNSWSV 23 05 i SW5V S HX825 IC1 06 10102 Gi 02 hey C O 1 4 4 22 UNSW12V A p WAT I
16. C806 1 8 33 PLL AUDIO AD DA 2 NE dari REF NO 20 000 SERIES 0807 8 5 76 gt 18 3 VDD r 0 01u R825 1 5 1 7 MARK REC PB MODE 8816 4 0808 68 NOT USE lt REF27M1 lt lt AW Aa 5 REF27M1 GND FSEL 768F8441K B R826 768FS48K edhe k B B GND 384FS48K 8827 AUDIO A768FS441K SIGNAL VMCLK lt lt RTS 1 22 gt XLMUTE gt gt XRMUTE RX 1 22 IC803 WM8590GEDS RV IC803 TX 1 gt CE 16803 D 3 4 AUDIO ADC DAC SCLK 1 gt gt je lt lt AINR FSEL 0 cim G E 4 A768FS48K lt lt 2 8 AINL lt lt 768 5441 AINL A768FS441K lt lt SE R844 ZFLANL 25 0 AOLRCKI lt lt 7 I KI lt lt AINL AOBCKI lt lt lt lt SWA5V D 2 rote 5 0 AODATAI lt lt I LP fe 2 5 ALRCKO 22 SEES C817 47u 40V ABCKO 22 6220 B p AOUTL 2 5 R839 AOUTL 2 5 AOUTR 2 5 AOUTR 0 AW zz gt gt AOUTL R840 0 2 2 gt gt AOUTR R841 0 ADATAO gt gt gt SW3 4V 2 gt En 22 AOUTR C804 TO 1 8 4 8 10u C805 E 5 8 6 8 B 0 1u B 2 5 8842 6 3V GND 22 gt AGND C812 C813 6 Tu 0
17. BBC2 B LOSSA Search Schedule a onej hwo 6 Promotional Panel 3 Select the TV broadcast station logo using gt then press ENTER The display returns to Grid and the programme currently being broadcast by the selected TV station is selected 4 Selecta programme using 4 and press ENTER To unlock the Video Window The Video Window is locked so that it does not change programme positions when you move the cursor across other titles From Grid select the logo of the programme position that is locked and press the red button Unlock f changes to and the Video Window is unlocked To lock the Video Window select the logo of the programme position you want to lock and press the red button Lock To return to the Home position Press the blue button The cursor returns to the home position on the Grid To set a programme for timer recording See One Button Recording GUIDE Plus page 56 To close the GUIDE Plus system Press TV GUIDE 30109 continued 47 48 50 Hints Press the PAGE lt e buttons to change the programme list by page Press the DAY buttons to change the programme list by day Q Notes The Video Window is locked during recording a
18. Homes Polic 1 Video Window This shows the programme you were watching when you pressed TV GUIDE 2 Action Bar When the same colour button on the remote is pressed the Action Bar functions The Action Bar function differs according to the screen Information Box Shows information about the selected programme when the Screen is displayed Contents will differ according to the displayed screen Menu Bar Press the blue button and press to move the cursor to the Menu Bar Then select one of the following features using 4 gt and press ENTER Grid Shows the programmes for the current time slot and next 7 days Search Allows you to search for titles by category or by keyword page 48 The displayed category depends upon the programme data received by this recorder Movies Sports and Children are examples of possible categories Sets the profile for your favourite programmes page 49 Schedule Displays the list of timer settings page 61 30109 gt continued 45 select a programme position quickly using the TV broadcast station logo 1 Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Screen appears 2 Press the yellow button Channels BBC2 25 May 1010 Press 4 to select a channel Press ENTER to return to the at this channel position
19. a RECCCR lt 17 So Sol RECVY 6 9 wn 03 L3B L3B lt e L3G L3G C744 C745 Y G MSD601 RST1 47u 47u 25V 25V 2360 ama Q710 3 3 REG CB B MSD601 RST1 R740 d 22 1 3 R1718 0 RECVY R785 R791 J703 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT D703 D704 1SR154 400TE 25 1SR154 400TE 25 J UNSW 8V V 22 UNSW5V V 22 0711 MSD601 RST1 Q715 25 1197 146 5V SWITCH TO 1 8 GND V 22 Q716 C774 C775 MUN2213T1 iu 47 SWITCH B 25V VIDEO IN OUT AV 106 6 8 4 15 4 16 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 AUX_L_IN ASW2 819 JL801 TU_SDA JL803 US TO 4
20. is selected and the connected TV cannot accept the resolution the recorder automatically adjusts the video signals that are suitable for the TV pue sumag continued 1 01 Pause Mode HDD DVDs only Selects the picture quality in pause mode The picture including subjects that move dynamically is output with no jitter Normally select this position The picture including subjects that do not move dynamically is output in high resolution Colour System Selects the colour system when playing VIDEO CDs including Super VIDEO CDs DivX video files Plays a disc in PAL colour system Plays a disc in NTSC colour system Auto Display On Automatically displays information on the screen when the recorder is turned On etc Off Displays information only when DISPLAY is pressed Screen Saver The screen saver image appears when you do not use the recorder for more than 10 minutes while an on screen display such as the System Menu is displayed on your TV screen The screen saver image helps prevent your display device from becoming damaged ghosting On Turns on the screen saver function Off Turns off the function siuswisn py pue 103 Audio Settings Audio The Audio setup allows you to adjust the sound according to the playback and connection conditions 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode
21. Po o 2 z u a aoo gt Es MO lt lt Si TZ JJ 2 o S OCL a lt UNSW6V R 2 lt BLY 6 Amor w R 542 HSM ST 182 43 2100 lt 0 100 0 00 0021 Lo TO FAN_DET SYNCHRO_DET lt DET gt gt RD 064 gt 6 BOARD 5 8 CONT lt lt CONI 22 x 3 SN606 FAN HI lt lt FAN 2 SEE PAGE 4 XX 5 UNSWSV R Y gt 44477 23 gt m 24 UNSW3V f SS o a 05 UNSW6V 2 5 2 UN WAW d 5 26 UNSW3V PCONT lt lt JL609 27 SW3 4VC 626 16V 28 SW3 4VC UNSW5V I DES 19652 100 POS 29 SW3 4VG GND 5 m SW3 4VC 31 VDEC3 3V GND V 22 c C656 0604 C607 Odu Olu 47u 32 VDEC3 3V B 16V IR INT 16V 16 VDEC3 3V IR BUSY lt lt RR DET E VDEC3 3V gt gt gt 34 VDEC3 3V E 22 roter EE S 80952CNMC G9NT2G E m ale 35 UNSW4V TB TXD o x gt lt ie RESET5V N C619 C620 C621 C622 C6 s T UNSWAV RESET5V lt lt 0 01 47 Oju 47 47 G m m 50V by 50V 50V c blb 37 UNSW4V UNSW4vVZy 38 UNSW4V GND R gt gt 39 40 GND ITSCK5 R1603 R699
22. Dolby Digital D PCM MPEG PCM DTS Off 48kHz 96kHz PCM 48kHz 16bit Audio HDMI Auto 2 Select Digital Out and press ENTER On Normally select this position Off The influence of the digital circuit upon the analogue circuit is minimal 3 Select and press ENTER 4 Setthe digital output signal Dolby Digital HDD DVDs only Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component lacking a built in Dolby Digital decoder The surround effects of output signals are determined by the Downmix setting item in the Audio setup Dolby Digital Select this when the recorder 15 connected to an audio component with a built in Dolby Digital decoder Recording Settings Recording The Recording setup allows you to adjust recording settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Recording and press ENTER The Recording setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined co N 2 SETUP Basic HDD Rec Settings Video DVD Rec Settings Audio Timer Settings Recording Direct Rec DVD Synchro Record to HDD Others Auto Chapter Easy Setup HDD Rec Settings Bilingual Recording Selects the sound to be recorded on the
23. Nc ponow NC _INT3 Input of sacrt IC s interpolate signal Output of tuner power supply control signal Output of RF gain control signal TU_PCONT 1 ES ES EN 80 0 AUTO PRESET I 0 ps se fo VAPCONT_ 0 OupuofpowercomlsgniforauioWdeo _ Fixed at H Input of area detection signal 5 89 AREA6 J I Fixed at H or L Input of area detection signal 6 99 O 9 0 0 5 mose o oe 1 pe 1 _ pe 16 wss Fixed at 17 Analog GND 5 2 Output of reset signal for LED and FLD driver ICs iw ur ___ Powersppyimu AmbgSV 14 vss Analog NDS 5 3 5 2 MAIN CONTROL IC 103 R8A34012BG RD 064 BOARD Pinno Pinname Ambi w A6 HDREQO Ar Owprow esmwesgmiU nc Wesa Am masea oo AM HADRS I7 Ouputofaddrss 13 O AI Rs RTS 5 1 2 1 ws 0 1 3 0 KB
24. Powersupply input Digital 330 ws vs pa O DsmOND DDATAI26 DDATAI27 sporo 0 R3 __ O Output of audio bit clock signal Powersupply input mi vss pa mp vs vs le ma vs lp ms vs 5 10 Na ns Na CNIS EM EN EM naa BN pa m KIE b pu NN ms NN ps pa pa pas audios BN me o Powersupply input 00002 ms vss VO 17for SDRAM Ti AOLRCKI 1 m paaro m sm m 1 vs m ooma i i PHYDIO 3 I Input of data 6 for PHY ER RE WE 70 imputofdaatforpy Powersupply input Output oF data mask signal for SDRAM Output of data strobe signal for Output of dita mask signal 3 for SDRAM OupuofdwamakspmlOfrSDRAM Oupuordwasucbesipul2forSDRAM 1 mpwordmasforbHY ____ 1 5 Za pare Nowed 2 Powersupply input Analog 3390 _ voo Powersupply input Digital Powersupply input Digit
25. lt lt IR INT 6 4 51 51 CTSO CLKS1 D P7 0 TxD1 SDA2 JL902 P8 5 __ RTS TCL KA lt lt STB_RXD NMI SD P7 1 RxD2 SCL2 JL901 TAOIN CLK1 lt lt STB_TXD P7 2 CLK2 TA10UT V RxD1 P7 3 CTS2 RTS2 TA1IN V TxD1 7 4 200 P7 5TA2IN W P7 6 TA3OUT 2 7 A M GND gt gt 7 0 1 8 GND T gt IR CONT AV 106 8 8 4 19 101103 COMPARATOR 21103 81142 SN74AHC1G00DCKR 4 9 JL904 p 81145 T m R1146 0 Q1104 25B1561T1000Q SWITCH T R1107 150 D1103 STZ6 8N T146 R1115 1120 i 0 C1103 41913 1u R1111 19140 09 1k Bi pun E J1101 G LINK RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 47 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 6 7 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ND3101 FLUORESCENT INDICATION TUBE A FL 166 BOARD FL DRIVER LINE2 IN POWER SW REF NO 30 000 SERIES NO MARK REC PB MODE Voltage measurement of the CSP IC and B the Transistors with T i eM 55 WR 5 mark is not possible 100uH koja eo 03110 c el g e g 03101 3
26. lt lt SW3 4V 1201 10uH 00 00 L202 10uH C223 C233 10u 0 22u E 4 5 IC202 B a 6 3V 63V 5 NO 10 10 4 8 5 8 6 8 778 a gt cc C222 1 8V REG gt aS 10u ub 6 3V 5 2012 x lt lt GND 4 28 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 REC656V REC656H RD 064 BOARD 3 8 V DEC REF NO 20 000 SERIES NO MARK REC PB MODE R REC MODE P PB MODE 22 2 gt gt REC656I 2 C316 S REGGE gt S REC656I 3 REC656I 4 AW V5 gt gt NIE 5 REC6561 5 0 REGGSEI E 5 REC656I 6 TO 1 8 RECCR V 2 REC656I 7 6 549 0 gaa aT 5 REC656I 7 z OQ 920 OTS x O 5 REC656CLKI REC656CLKI CEEESS REC656H T gt C317 28 fees UM gt REC656H R303 0 1u a 5656 656 22 xa SS 8 B 5 gt gt REC656V gt gt 5 C6 GPIO RED REGE w 1 VI_1B SES SDCL O lt lt 50 RECG 33 eee C7 GPIO GREEN lt ZSDCL
27. 10 16V 701 1 770 468 21 PIN CONNECTOR BOARD 10 0843 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V 0844 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V lt DIODE gt 0845 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5 50V 0846 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 5 50V D101 8 719 073 34 DIODE EC21QS03L TE12L D301 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W C847 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5 50V D303 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W 0848 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5 50V D304 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W 0849 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5 50V D608 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W 0850 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5 50V 0851 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220PF 5 50V 0701 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W 0702 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C852 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 5 50V 0703 8 719 053 18 DIODE 15R154 400TE 25 C853 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V 0704 8 719 053 18 DIODE 15R154 400TE 25 C854 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V 0714 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C855 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V 0856 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V 0715 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0721 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 6861 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V 0724 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0862 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V 0728 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0863 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V 0731 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0864 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 10V 0865 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10 1
28. Preset Download You can download the tuner preset data from your TV to this recorder and tune the recorder according to that data in Easy Setup This greatly simplifies the Easy Setup procedure Automatic Power Off The recorder will turn off automatically if the recorder is not used after you turn off the TV NexTView Download You can easily set the timer by using the NexT View Download function on your TV See your TV s instruction manual 1 MEGALOGIC is a registered trademark of Grundig Corporation 2 RKASYLINK and CINEMALINK are trademarks of Philips Corporation Q Link and NexTView Link are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation 4 EURO VIEW LINK is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation 3 T V LINK is a trademark of JVC Corporation Hint SMARTLINK also works with TVs or other equipment having EPG Timer Control EPG Title Download and Now Recording functions For details refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV or other equipment Notes The SMARTLINK features are available only when Video is selected in Output The power must be turned on to use all SMARTLINK features except One Touch Play One Touch Menu and One Touch EPG Not all TVs respond to the functions above 19 Step 3 Connecting the Audio Cords Select one of the following patterns or according to the input jack on your TV monitor project
29. SW 4 21 4 22 FL 166 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 49 for printed wiring board 2 3 1 257 BOARD DV REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED REF NO 30 000 SERIES MODE TO FL 166 BOARD CN3102 ees THE FLR 008 SEE PAGE 4 22 CN3001 8P FLD STB 10 11 12 13 14 CN3003 15P IT GND IT GND SIGNAL PATH FL POW 6V LED DIM 5V SIRCS SIRCS_5V LED_DT LED_RST LED_CK LED_STB FLD_STB KEYO KEY1 KEY2 5 1 R3003 2 03002 R3004 44 102002 IC3001 Wes 1 9 5 0 SWITCH LED DRIVER R3008 03001 MUN2211T1 SWITCH 1 3001 BU2050F E2 SYNCHRO REC HDD JL3001 D3002 D3004 KEYO 1 SLR 332VRT32 R3006 EB3804X TP J555K JL3002 LECK A 220 LED_CK 83009 405093 FLSTB ye d W LED_DT E LEDT JL3005 R3007 D3005 4 220 SLI 343YCT32WST FR 5V A R3010 E DVD 150 IT GND D3003 4 SLR 332VRT32 TIMER REC DVD JL3029 m e 15 JL3030 Eh 14 JL3031 ka 13 JL3033 ti 11 JL3034 E 0 JL3035 9 LEDT JL3036 8 LERST 43037 7 LECK LESTB JL3039 5 FLSTB ade p JL3041 3 ana JL3042 03001 16 2 2 STZ6 8
30. TMDS DATAO HDMI OUT 10910 5V REG 10910 TK70550SCL G s sp C955 027 W 1 1608 1668 SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA Y CHROMA AUDIO SIGNAL 4 40 lt 768F50H_ gt 18 roczny RDR HX820 HX825 SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 2001EK p L105 250V L106 00 T101 Q301 A P301 D301 L301 251438 1302 0304 FORMER AN UM SF5LC20U 3 7uH 12V REG 10uH 11 0506 5 4 0101 00 itti STWBAGDB 106 R104 CN1 4P 1000p 1kV 199k Maz 6303 0302 u R302 2 MTZJT 22B 35V m UNIT Bons 1074 0303 A C306 113 10k 1 SWITCH 150u 4 D105 100p R308 25 10301 M5237ML Ww C307 CN2 4P 10u 50V SW 12V IC101 MIP 2E7 01 JE GND HDD i D501 PQO5RD21 GND UNIT OSC FCQ10A06 5 8 5 ON ouT 2 4 swsv CN3 15P A ERNE m 9 7102 1k VR501 3 R507 DSP 501N PSZSGIAL 47k 2 UNSW 12V 504 tL C508 3 GND C502 mp 150 emm R503 25V 4 GND M 5 UNSW 6V TO R102 AV 106 BOARD 1 8 502 6 UNSW CN101 dins konw UNSW 0201 FCQ06A06 0 UNSW 4V UNSW 4V D601 t C2
31. B6 DE RST DE DREQ AT1DIOW 44 AT1DIOR AT1IORDY C5 AT1DMACK 65 A5 AT2DATA O AT2DATA 15 AT2RESET AT2CS 1 AT2CS 0 AT2ADR 2 AT2ADR 1 AT2ADR 0 AT2TNTRQ AT2DMACK AT2IORDY AT2DIOR AT2DIOW AT2DMARQ PHYDIO 0 PHYDIO 7 DDATAO DDATA31 DADRSO DADRS12 DBAO DBA1 m 00053 id DDM3 DCLKNO DCLKO AD DCS DRAS DCAS DWE HDATAO HDATA15 HADRS6 HADRS30 V3 U4 W1 V U3 V1 U2 T4 14 15 1718 PHYSCLK 2 PHYCTL 0 CYr 0 5 PHYCTL 1 PHYLPS PHYLREQ HOE 88 HWSO HCSO H1 J3 J1 K3 AT2DATA 0 15 M4 L2 L4 K2 K4 J2 J4 H2 AT2RESET AT2CS 1 AT2CS 0 AT2ADR 2 AT2ADR 1 AT2ADR 0 AT2TNTRQ AT2DMACK AT2IORDY AT2DIOR AT2DIOW AT2DMARQ Mi HCSN1 HDA 2 DA 1 DA 0 INTRQ DMACK IORDY DIORN DIOW DMARQ ja ZEE ZB SL ES CE GL 6 8 PHY PHYDIO 0 7 8 9 11 12 PHYCTL 1 PHYLPS PHYLREQ 63 LREQ 22 23 21 25 21 25 R21 24 25 123 1723 24 21 22 25 65 GD RX M 28 RX P 27 wo rm CN203 2 8 16201 HDD DRIVE X201 25MHz DVD UNIT TO FROM AV 106 BOARD CN602 SEE PAGE 3 4 HDD UNIT CN701 XI 27 576MHz
32. C11 C16 D11 D15 HADRS 6 30 HOE HWS 0 HCS 0 18 26 XOE XWE XRESET XSYSRST 4 8 SUPER AND MEMORY 128Mbit 3 6 ro co gt 1 CN3102 1 p S3101 POWER hoe CN3004 RDR HX820 HX825 3 4 RD 064 2 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 RD 064 BOARD 2 2 REC6560 1 AD14 AB14 16904 8 6 15 15 HDMI TH AC16 AD17 TMDS DATA 2 wB TS DATA2 2 65 TMDS DATA 2 B TX1 63 TMDA DATA 1 Da Ge _________________1 05 DATA 1 DATA 1 n 60 TMDS DATA 0 0 0 DATA 0 TMDS CLOCK HDMI TMDS GLOCK TXC TXC 1 8 1 906 8 8 1 103 2 2 AND GATE RISM3 16902 8 8 SCALER 4 ADATAOH 0 SPDIFOH ADATAOH ALRCKOH ABCKOH RD 064 BOARD 1 2 SEE PAGE 3 5 RD 064 BOARD 768FSOH 1 2 SEE PAGE 3 5 10903 8 8 SUB CPU XEXRST TXD RXD 6 Not Use DLON TO 16910 PIN Power Block CN901 3 7 3 8 RDR HX820 HX825 3 5 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM GER RV dicU ee SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 2001EK 1 0101 TRANSFORMER UNSW 4V 502
33. Sound is noisy gt When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 1 TV jack or LINE 3 DECODER jack page 69 The sound volume is low gt The sound volume is low on some DVDs The sound volume may improve if you set Audio in the Audio setup to Mode page 106 gt Set Audio ATT in the Audio setup to Off page 104 An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or played gt When recording from connected equipment set Line Audio Input in OPTIONS menu to Bilingual page 65 gt Multilingual tracks main and sub cannot be recorded on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs Video mode To record the language set Bilingual Recording of the DVD Rec Settings in the Recording setup to or Sub before recording page 107 To record both the main and sub sounds record on DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode TV programme pictures are distorted Reorient the TV aerial Adjust the picture see the TV s instruction manual Place the recorder and TV farther apart Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables farther apart The aerial cable is connected to the AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack 4 gt gt gt gt TV channels cannot be changed gt The channel is disabled page 97 gt timer recording started which c
34. Y ON 0 N The stiff wire S pa S NA 3 Two claws X jj ut 2 Open the tray 4 Tray assembly 2 4 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY D Seven claws 2 Front panel assembly 2 3 2 5 FL 166 BOARD FR 257 BOARD 2 Connector CN3101 FL 166 board Three tapping screws BV 3 x 4 FL cover CD Flexible flat cable 6 Flexible flat cable FAR 005 3003 7 Connector CN3005 Three tapping screws FR 257 board 3 x 8 2 6 HARD DISK SECTION 8 Four tapping screws BV 3 x 8 6 Remove the Hard disk section in the direction of the arrow D Pin BV 3 x 8 Q e 77 Ad 4 Spring 2 7 HARD DISK Remove the HDD shield plate in the direction of the arrows 8 Hard disk section 2 55 077 7 Hard disk 3 Four screws 2 8 D C FAN 4 Remove the D C fan in the direction of the arrow 8 Two tapping screws BV 3 x 10 2 Connector CN103 D Pin 2 9 DVD DRIVE 4 Four tapping screws Remove the DVD section BV 3 x 8 in the direction of the arrow 2 Ra Connector 2 2 DVD drive A Flexible flat cable FRD 011 3 Flexible flat cable FRD 011 CN201 Two 227 2 1
35. 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 107 826 11 1 128 994 21 1 128 994 21 1 165 908 11 1 162 962 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 162 960 11 1 125 777 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 849 11 1 164 849 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 125 837 91 1 112 001 81 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 852 11 1 164 852 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 165 887 91 1 124 779 00 1 165 887 91 1 128 994 21 1 126 205 11 1 165 908 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 125 838 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 126 205 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 128 993 21 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP EL
36. DIODE L201 L202 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B L301 lt FERRITE BEAD gt L302 L303 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 L602 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 L603 FERRITE EMI SMD 2012 L604 FERRITE EMI SMD 2012 FERRITE EMI SMD 2012 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 Q601 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 Q602 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 Q603 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 Q604 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 Q605 EMI FERRITE SMD 1608 Q606 FERRITE 0607 lt FILTER gt FILTER EMI REMOVAL SMD R103 FILTER EMI REMOVAL SMD R104 FILTER EMI REMOVAL SMD R105 FILTER CHIP EMI R108 FILTER CHIP EMI R109 FILTER CHIP EMI R110 FILTER CHIP EMI R111 FILTER CHIP EMI R112 R113 lt 16 gt R117 IC TK11133CSCL G R118 IC R8A34012BG R119 IC HYB25DC512160CE 6 R120 IC HYB25DC512160CE 6 R121 IC MM1762FHBE R122 IC TK11133CSCL G R123 IC SN74LVC2G34DCKR R124 IC 888A8040 TBC1C000 125 IC S T111B18MC OGDTFG R126 IC TVP5146M2PFP 127 IC BH18MASWHFV TR 128 IC S29GL256N90TFIR20 R129 IC MP2105DJ LF Z R130 PQ1MX55M2SPG R131 IC SN74HCTO8APWR R132 IC SN74LVO8APWR R133 IC uPD72852AGB 8EU A R134 IC ICS650G 42LFT R135 IC WM8590GEDS RV R136 IC MM1562FFBE 137 8 15 Part No 6 706 520 01 6 806 931 01 6 703 046 01 6 707 119 01 6 704 470 01 6 702 302 01 6 710 105 01 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 1 400 073 21 1 469 555 21 1 469 555 21 8 729 010 05 8 729 010 05 8 729 010 05 8 729 010 05
37. Mode PLAY signal 100 Color bars Scart Video output connector pin 19 terminated in 750 Instrument Oscilloscope 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p Test point Specification Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to OFF 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 10096 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p 1 0 0 07 Vp p Fig 7 7 8 ScartVideo Output S Y Check Purpose This check confirms that the Scart Y signal output has the rated amplitude If it adjusted incorrectly the playback video signal will not be displayed corrected even when the Scart cable is connected Test point Scart Video output connector 19 terminated 750 Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to OFF 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p MM 1 0 0 07 Vp p ONE Fig 7 8 7 3 9 ScartVideo Output S C Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the Scart output S C conforms to the PAL standard If it adjusted incorrectly the playback color will not be too dark or too thin Test point Scart Video output connector 49 terminated in 750 Specification 300 mV 30 mVp p Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to OFF 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 300 mV 30 mVp p 1300 30 mV
38. 6660 ENTER Example for channel 50 Press 5 0 then press ENTER Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus system Follow the steps below to set up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus system Note that the OSD language Clock Country and Postal Code are all set for the GUIDE Plus system when Easy Setup is completed 1 Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Screen appears 2 Select Setup in the Menu Bar using 4 7 and press ENTER The GUIDE Plus setup menu appears 3 Select Basic Setup using and press ENTER 4 Select External Receiver 1 and press ENTER You can also select External Receiver 2 or External Receiver 3 if you have connected additional set top box receivers Press ENTER to select Continue Select the set top box receiver type using and press ENTER Select the provider using and press ENTER Select the receiver brand using and press ENTER If you select Other providers you can select a receiver brand from a list of all available brands If your receiver brand is not on the list select 2922 The receiver brand list is automatically updated so your receiver may be available at a later date Select your brand when it becomes available Until then use 292 GOI Step 6 Easy Setup Make the basic adjustments by following the on screen instructions in
39. In this case you can compile highlight scenes as a Playlist title You can even rearrange the scene order within the Playlist title The Playlist title calls up data from the original titles for playback When an original title is used for a Playlist title the original title cannot be edited and erased Q Note Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the copy protection signal cannot be dubbed or moved page 87 pue GuiseJ gt continued 81 The title moves to the new location move more titles go to step 3 To finish select and press ENTER Combining multiple Playlist titles Combine HDD ETS 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original menu appears press 2 Press OPTIONS to select Combine and press ENTER The display for selecting titles appears 3 Select a title and press ENTER A number indicating the order in which you selected the title appears To cancel the selection press ENTER again OK Select the titles to combine Cancel 4 Yacht Mon 25 9 gt 3 Cruising Mon 25 9 2 Journey Sun 17 9 Reset 1 Vacation Fri 15 9 4 Repeat step 3 to select all of the titles you want to combine To cancel all of the selections select Reset 5 Select OK and press ENTER The list of titles to be combined appears To change the selection select Change
40. Line3 Input Selects a method of inputting video signals for the LINE 3 DECODER jack The picture will not be clear if this setting does not match the type of video input signal Video RGB Inputs video signals or RGB signals Decoder Select this when connecting to a PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder If you connect to a cable box satellite receiver such as CanalSat do not select this option S Video Inputs S video signals Line3 Output Selects a method of outputting video signals for the LINE 3 DECODER jack Outputs video signals Outputs S video signals 16 9 4 3 Letter Box 4 3 Pan Scan Q Note Depending on the disc 4 3 Letter Box may be selected automatically instead of 4 3 Pan Scan or vice versa HDMI Resolution Selects the type of video signals output from the HDMI OUT jack When you select Auto default the recorder outputs video signals of the highest resolution acceptable for your TV If the picture is not clear natural or to your satisfaction try another option that suits the disc and your TV projector etc For details refer also to the instruction manual supplied with the TV projector etc Auto Normally select this 1920 10801 Sends 1920x1080i video signals 1280x720p Sends 1280x720p video signals 720x480 Sends 720x480 576p video 576p signals Note Even when a setting other than
41. Off Indicates whether protection is set DVD RW DVD R in VR mode only 2 Protect Disc 3 Select Protect Disc and press ENTER 4 select Protect and press ENTER To cancel the protection Select Unprotected in step 4 t Hint You can set protection for individual titles page 78 Unfinalising a disc For DVD RWs Video mode DVD RWs Video mode that have been finalised to prohibit additional recording or editing can be unfinalised to allow further recording or editing For DVD RWs VR mode If you cannot record or edit on a DVD RW VR mode that has been finalised with other DVD equipment unfinalise the disc Q Note The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD RWs Video mode that have been finalised on another recorder 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears 3 Select Unfinalise and press ENTER The recorder starts unfinalising the disc Unfinalising may take several minutes 1 Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment Finalise Finalising is necessary when you play discs recorded with this recorder on other DVD equipment When you finalise a DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode a DVD menu will be automatically created which can be displayed on other DVD equipment Before finalising check the differences between t
42. Output of DTT contol signal OwprorUARTCSIOIGMO SOS OwpwofUARTCSIJGHO 2 um __ AM o Ax TRDATAG Nowed Ax of AM ol Power supply mpu Digas _ ar ____ Powersppyimpu Digia34V ___ vop Power supply input aus VSS AA Pewersppyipu Diia UV aus vss aa 5 Came voos Power supply npr Diga aa _ AA Power supply LAAI DADRSGI DADRSIO DorSDRAM Lao vop Powersupply input Digital lU Lam vomas Pewersppyimu Digial2SV _ E AA25 DDATA 4 Input output of data 4 for SDRAM Fixed at L 3 0 8 24 DDATA 3 Input output of data 3 for SDRAM 4 7 5 4 __ uo mm _ VOCAADIOA Powersupply dA W A DE _ Taps VROA VROB Powersupply input Analog _ ABS Power supply input Analog 2 ABS Powersupply input Analog VCCADAI0 Powe
43. RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP 1K 10K 1K 470 1M 100K 22 100 22 100 2 2 2 2 100 10 0 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref R337 R338 R513 R518 R519 R522 R524 R525 R532 R533 R535 R547 R549 R565 R603 R605 R607 R609 R611 R612 R613 R614 R615 R616 R617 R618 R619 R620 R621 R623 R624 R626 R627 R628 R629 R630 R631 R635 R638 R639 R640 R641 R642 R643 R644 R645 R646 R647 R649 R650 R652 R655 R658 R661 R662 R663 R664
44. RISM_RTS_O 1 Input of RS signal with system maxo Output of serial TXD signal wth ICON HX825 mode _ s 1 1 Input of serial RXD signal wth I CON HX825 mod 7 RISM_STATUSI 1 Input of communication status 1 signal with sytem oto _ 6 pa w Owpwofssempovercomriswiingsgml _ 1 impu oftan stopping detectsignal SSS 49 FAN ONOHF O Output of fan on off signal on ravsmED 0 Output of fan direction speed switching signal H high speed 9 1 __ Fixed at L when the flash is overwritten is VCC Nc po Nd 55 INSELPCONT O Output of IC s power supply signal H INSEL 56 0 Outputof muting signal foraudio SSCS Fixed at L Input of area detection signal 0 60 AREAL I Fixed at H Input of area detection signal 1 XPYMUTE Ouputofmuingsi naforwee ___ SOS e mss msi e ms se EERSDA Output of IC data signal with EEPROM SS a clock signal with EEPROM 0 we Output of IC writing protect signal with EEPROM vea Power supply input Dita SSCS msHa ol 2 Ca vs bea O OOOO m mss ol OOOO
45. Standard Password The lower value the stricter limitation Discs rated higher than the selected level will be restricted 6 Select the level and press ENTER The Parental Control setting is complete To cancel the Parental Control setting for the disc set Level to Off in step 6 To change the password select Password in step 3 and press ENTER When the display for registering a password appears enter a new four digit password using the number buttons then select and press ENTER Notes If you forget your password you will have to reset it by selecting Parental Control of Factory Setup in the Others setup page 110 When you play discs which do not have the Parental Control function playback cannot be limited on this recorder Depending on the disc you may be asked to change the Parental Control level while playing the disc In this case enter your password then change the level Language DVD VIDEO only DVD Menu Switches the language for the DVD menu Audio Switches the language of the sound track When you select Original the language given priority in the disc is selected Subtitle Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on the disc When you select Audio Follow the subtitle language changes according to the language you selected for the sound track Easy Setup Resetting the R
46. Titles containing copy protection signals can be moved only from HDD to DVD RW DVD R VR mode after the title is moved the original title in the HDD is erased The function 15 performed using the same procedure as dubbing page 88 Titles containing Once copy protection signals are indicated with Notes The following titles in the HDD cannot moved Protected titles Playlist titles Original titles referenced from the playlist When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free disc space for DVD Rs DVD Rs Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy protection signal the recording restrictions on that title are retained CPRM compatible DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode only gt 87 88 90 Dubbing HDD CUI LUNA EW Em ET Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing 1 Insert the DVD that you are going to dub to or from 2 Press HDD or DVD to select the source 3 Press TITLE LIST Press lt gt to switch the Title Lists if necessary 4 Selecta title and press ENTER The sub menu appears D Select Dubbing and press ENTER The display for selecting the dubbing mode appears If a title with 2522 page 87 is selected in the title list a confirmation display is displaye
47. continued 11 5 116 118 Some functions such as Stop Search Slow motion Play cannot be performed gt Depending on the DVD you may not be able to do some of the operations above See the instruction manual supplied with the disc The language for the sound track cannot be changed Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played gt The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track gt Try changing the language using the DVD VIDEO s menu The subtitle language cannot be changed or turned off gt Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles Try changing the subtitle using the DVD VIDEO s menu The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder The angles cannot be changed gt Multi angles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO being played You are trying to change the angles when does not appear in front panel display page 66 The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO s menu The angles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder The angles cannot be changed during slow motion playback or when playback is paused 4 8 4 4 The DivX video files do not play gt The file is not created in DivX format gt The file has an extension other than avi or div
48. seams that are left over from editing may remain on the disc If you edit a title use the Original Dubbing or Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing method This will smooth out the seams Original Dubbing HDD lt gt cus Original Dubbing allows you to make smooth dubbings by de emphasizing the seams that are left over from editing In this case the recording mode is set to the same recording mode that the source title was recorded in To set the Dub Mode to Original you must make your selection from the Dub Selected Titles display page 89 Note that you cannot select Original when using the Dubbing method explained in Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing page 88 Note If the recording mode of the dubbing source title is unknown when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD Dub Mode is automatically set to SP in the Dub Selected Titles display page 89 1 21 Dubbing HDD lt gt DVD Before Dubbing HDD END EW In this section dubbing refers to copying a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive HDD to another disc or vice versa You can select to dub one title at a time Title Dubbing see Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing on page 88 or multiple titles all at once Multiple Title Dubbing see Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles on page 89 Before you start read the f
49. 10V 6 3V 10V 10V 10V 16V 6 3V 16V 10V 16V Ref 1038 C1041 CN201 CN603 CN606 CN701 CN901 CN902 D915 FB101 FB103 FB106 FB107 FB110 FB111 FB112 FB602 FB603 FB604 FB605 FB606 FL501 FL 02 FL801 FL902 FL904 FL905 FL906 907 10101 10103 10105 10106 10108 10109 10112 10201 10202 10301 16302 10502 10601 16602 16604 10605 10701 10802 10803 10901 Part No 1 112 833 11 1 125 777 11 1 818 957 51 1 818 958 11 1 818 958 11 1 573 806 21 1 691 591 11 1 820 747 11 8 719 069 56 1 400 794 21 1 400 794 21 1 469 670 21 1 469 670 21 1 469 670 21 1 400 794 21 1 400 794 21 1 400 794 21 1 400 794 21 1 400 794 21 1 400 794 21 1 469 084 21 1 234 867 11 1 234 867 11 1 234 867 11 1 234 177 21 1 234 177 21 1 234 177 21 1 234 177 21 1 234 177 21 6 702 302 01 6 708 896 01 6 708 812 01 6 708 812 01 6 708 935 01 6 702 302 01 6 704 353 01 6 806 103 01 6 705 311 01 6 708 848 01 6 708 882 01 6 708 924 01 6 708 889 01 6 706 237 01 8 759 660 23 8 759 548 99 6 706 365 01 6 708 929 01 6 708 888 01 8 759 837 19 Description Remarks Ref No ELECT CHIP 68uF 2096 16V 10902 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 10V 12903 1906 CONNECTOR 1907 1908 CONNECTOR 40P CONNECTOR BOAD TO BOAD 42P 1909 CONNECTOR BOAD TO BOAD 42P 10910 PIN CONNECTOR 1 5MM SMD 6P PIN CONNECTOR 1 5MM SMD 8P CONNECTOR HDMI L101 L102
50. Do not attempt to replace or upgrade the hard disk by yourself as this may result in malfunction If the hard disk drive should malfunction you cannot recover lost data The hard disk drive is only a temporary storage space About repairing the hard disk drive The contents of the hard disk drive may be checked in case of repair or inspection during a malfunction or modification However the contents will not be backed up or saved by Sony If the hard disk needs to be formatted or replaced it will be done at the discretion of Sony contents of the hard disk drive will be erased including contents that violate copyright laws On power sources The recorder is not disconnected from the AC power source mains as long as it is connected to the wall outlet even if the recorder itself has been turned off If you are not going to use the recorder for a long time be sure to disconnect the recorder from the wall outlet To disconnect the AC power cord mains lead grasp the plug itself never pull the cord On placement Place the recorder in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent heat build up in the recorder Do not place the recorder on a soft surface such as a rug that might block the ventilation holes Do not place the recorder in a confined space such as a bookshelf or similar unit Do not place the recorder in a location near heat sources or in a place subject to direct sunligh
51. Easy Setup Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit the Easy Setup function during this procedure buttons Number e sv ENTER dy RETURN o TV Ib 1 Turn on the recorder and your TV Then switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on your TV screen The initial settings message appears If this message does not appear select Easy Setup from SETUP in the System Menu page 111 9 Select the connection you used for your set top box receiver using and press ENTER When the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using hookup A or C select Antenna When set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using hookup B select Line3 The display asks for confirmation 10 Press ENTER to select Continue The Video Window switches to the specified programme position 11 Select YES using and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation If the Video Window does not switch to the specified programme position select and press ENTER until the Video Window switches to the specified programme position If you cannot get the recorder to control your set top box receiver Check the connection and position of the set top box controller page 14 If your set top box receiver still does not operate with this recorder refer to the instructions supplied with your set top box
52. Input Station Name GI Back Clear All Space To enter characters see page 39 PAY TV CANAL Sets the PAY TV Canal Plus channels For details see page 31 Audio Select NICAM or Standard NICAM Normally select this Standard Select this if the sound from NICAM broadcasts is not clear 3 Press 4 until the selected programme position row moves to the desired programme position The selected programme position is inserted at the new programme position Basic Programme Sort 4 Press ENTER to confirm the setting 5 To change the programme position of another station repeat from step 2 Auto Programme Title Labelling TV Guide Page Some broadcast systems provide a Teletext service in which complete programmes and their data title date programme position recording start time etc are stored day by day A TV guide page corresponds to each day of the week When recording a programme the recorder automatically takes the programme name from the Teletext pages and stores it as the title name The TV guide page numbers depend entirely on the broadcast itself and may be subject to change If so you may have to set those TV guide page numbers manually in the TV Guide Page menu Not available in some areas 1 Select TV Guide Page in and press ENTER The TV
53. RDR HA920 HA029 RMT D230P D231P SERVICE MANUAL AEP Model TED RDR HX820 HX825 LLET BAI Self Diagnosis Supported model 5555 Photo RDR HX820 RMT D230P DVD UISG e gt DVD ReWritable VIDEO R RW 4 SHOWVIEW GEMSTAR HdT for RDR HX825 SPECIFICATIONS System Inputs and outputs General Laser Semiconductor laser LINE 2 OUT Power requirements 220 240 V AC Channel coverage AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms 10 kilohms 50 60 Hz PAL SECAM B G D K I L VHF E2 to E12 R1 to R12 F2 to F10 Italian A to H Ireland A to J South Africa 4 to 13 UHF E21 to E69 R21 to R69 B21 to B69 F21 to F69 501 to S05 S1 to S20 France B to Q HYPER S21 to S41 The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances Video reception Frequency synthesizer system Audio reception Split carrier system Aerial out 75 ohm asymmetrical aerial socket Timer Clock Quartz locked Timer indication 24 hour cycle digital Power back up duration 1 hour Video recording format MPEG 2 MPEG 1 Audio recording format applicable bit rate Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps 128 kbps in EP and SLP mode VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 2 IN AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms more than 22 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini
54. RISMSTATUS2 SW BUFFER RX 0 lt SCLK 0 lt GND P CONT swiv lt lt SW3 4V UNSW4V CN501 SEE PAGE 3 4 12 24 BOUT la 5 515 5 5 lt lt lt W o 4 00 RTI BUFFER RECB CSYNC 32 GND V e 35 RECG eov GND_V V 38 Y G e RR 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 GND V JL616 sporo C 19 soro XLMUTE i 2 XLMUTE SPD_GND 1 JL618 5 AUGND ue AINL 1 AINL gt Ez 1 7 AOUTR CN606 42P AINL lt JL601 AOUTR gt Ez 9 AOUTR 191 sus m 601 192 TScuG 06 MSB709 RT1 2 4 gt RISM STATUS1 BUFFER O 41506 10 7 9 12 RES 13 AUGND 5 RISM RTS O 7 TU AINR lt 14 AINR JLG09 AW AOUTL gt gt 15 AOUTL 7 ITXRST5 R615 150 0 Faa AINR lt lt 17 50075 RAP ok n a H emus AOUTL gt 17 7 02 612 06 Ji631 L BUFFER XRMUTE gt 19 XRMUTE 10 AV 106 dnia m
55. and press ENTER Basic Programme Setting m Prog System Channel Name Audio AFT BG C1 AAB Off NICAM On 2 DK 51 Standard 3 5 FGH Off NICAM On Press 4 to select the programme position and press ENTER Basic Programme Setting m Prog System Channel Name RN Audio AFT 1 BG C1 AAB Off NICAM On 2 DK 51 Standard On 3 5 FGH Off NICAM v Select the item you want to change using gt and change the settings using and press ENTER Basic Programme Setting As Prog System Channel Name EAA Audio AFT 1 BG C1 AAB Off NICAM On DK 51 Standard 3 BG 5 Off NICAM On v 4 preset another programme position repeat from step 2 System Select an available TV system page 97 BG Select this when in West European countries except those listed in Receivable channels on page 97 DK Select this when in East European countries Select this when in Great Britain Ireland Select this when in France Corre Channel Receivable sponding Set Frequency channel number range MHz S25 S28 331 25 339 25 S26 S29 339 25 347 25 S27 S30 347 25 355 25 528 531 355 25 363 25 529 532 363 25 371 25 530 533 371 25 379 25 531 534 379 25 387 25 532 535 387 25 395 25 533 536 395 25 403 25 534 537 40
56. 1 107 826 11 1 124 589 11 1 164 217 11 Description AV 106 BOARD COMPLETE K KK K K K K K K K K lt CAPACITOR gt CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP uPD UPD Remarks Ref No 0311 0312 Ref No 10 000 SERIES C313 0314 0315 1uF 10 10V 0316 10uF 20 6 3V 0317 0 01uF 10 16V 0318 10uF 20 10V 0319 1uF 10 10V 0320 100 5 50V 0321 0 01uF 10 25 C322 1uF 10 25 0324 10 25 0325 47uF 20 35V C326 470uF 20 10V C327 10uF 20 10V 0336 0 1uF 10 16V 0337 470 10 50 0401 10uF 20 6 3V 405 0 1uF 10 16V 0407 0 1uF 10 16V 0408 100uF 20 10V 0409 10uF 20 10V 0410 0 01uF 10 16V C411 47uF 20 16V C414 10uF 20 6 3V C415 10uF 20 6 3V 0416 0 1uF 10 16V 0449 0 1uF 10 16V C452 0 1uF 10 16V 0453 0 1uF 10 16V 6454 10uF 2096 10V C455 10uF 20 10V 0456 10uF 20 10V 0601 10uF 20 10V C602 ATPF 5 50V 0604 ATPF 5 50V 0607 47uF 20 16V C613 100uF 20 16V C614 22UF 20 16V 6615 0 22uF 10 10V 0616
57. 1 216 833 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 414 864 11 1 414 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 Description METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP FERRITE EMI SMD 1608 FERRITE EMI SMD 1608 SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 10K 100 100 2 2K 2 2K 10K 10K 10K 33K 10K 680K 47K 100K 6 8K 1 6K 470 39K 22K 22 22 22 22 75 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 1K 10K 4 7K O 10K 75 75 75 0 0 0 100 100 2 2K 100K 100K 100K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
58. 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 771 337 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 1 805 774 21 Description GONDUCTOR NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK GONDUCTOR NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK 2010X4 47K 1005X4 47K 1005X4 47K 1005X4 47K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 22 1005 4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 100 1005X4 100 1005X4 100 1005X4 100 1005X4 2010X4 47K 1005X4 47K 1005X4 47K 1005X4 47K 1005X4 68 1005X4 68 1005X4 68 1005X4 68 1005X4 RES NETWORK 82 4 1005 RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK SWITCH 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22K 1005X4 2010X4 2010X4 2010X4 2010X4 10K 1005X4 47 1005X4 47 1005X4 47 1005X4 SWITCH SLIDE NO
59. 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 1K 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 0 100 5 0 10K 5 10K 5 100K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 0 5 100K 5 10K 5 10K 5 Remarks Ref No 1 10W R683 1 10W R684 1 10W R685 1 10W R686 R687 1 10W R688 R692 1 10W R693 1 10W R694 R696 1 10W R697 1 10W R698 1 10W R699 1 10W R 02 1 10W 705 1 10W R712 1 10W R 13 R714 1 10W R 15 1 10W R 16 1 10W R 18 1 10W R 19 1 10W R726 1 10W R728 1 10W R729 R733 1 10W R736 1 10W R738 HX825 R740 1 10W 742 1 10W HX625 R 44 R747 1 10W R749 HX825 R750 1 10W R751 1 10W 1 10W R 52 1 10W R753 R755 1 10W R760 1 10W R761 1 10W 1 10W R 64 1 10W R765 R766 1 10W R 67 R 68 1 10W R772 1 10W R776 R779 1 10W R780 1 10W 785 1 10W 820 R791 1 10W R795 1 10W R798 R799 1 10W R802 1 10W 1 10W R803 1 10W R804 HX625 R805 1 10W R806 807 8 9 Part No 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 883 11 1 218 871 11 1 216 855 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 845 11 1 218 867 11 1 218 852 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 840 11 1 216 837 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 801 11 1 216 801 11 1 216 801 11 1 216 801 11 1 216 801 11 1 218 285 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 821 11
60. 3 Select Host Channel Setup using and press ENTER 4 Press the yellow button Change twice Manual appears 2 25 May 10 10 8 Press the green button to save your entries Press the yellow button to switch between automatic and manual Press gt to edit Source and Programme _ Number Host Channel Setup Source Prog No Manual Tuner In order to receive TV Listing data you must enter the correct Source and Programme Number of a GUIDE Plus Host Channel It may take up to 24 hours to receive complete TV listings data Select Source using gt Press the yellow button Source repeatedly to select the input source 5 6 7 Select Prog No using gt 8 9 Enter the programme position number using the number buttons Press the green button Save The display asks for confirmation 10 Select Confirm using lt gt and press ENTER The display returns to the GUIDE Plus setup menu 11 Wait one day until the programme guide data can be received Timer Recording Before Recording Before you start recording Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording page 38 For the HDD DVD RWs and DVD RWs you can free up disc space by erasing titles page 78 Adjust the recording picture quality and picture size if necessary page 60 t Hint Timer recordings will be made regardless
61. 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W Ref No R808 R809 R810 R819 R820 R821 R822 R823 R825 R827 R828 R835 R836 R839 R840 R841 R842 R844 R845 R852 R854 R858 R859 R860 R861 R862 R863 R864 R865 R866 R867 R868 R869 R870 R871 R872 R873 R874 R875 R876 R877 R878 R879 R885 R886 R887 R888 R889 R896 R897 R898 R899 R965 R1101 R1103 Part No 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 813 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 857 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 218 285 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 807 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 216 845 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 218 285 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 845 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 821 1
62. CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF uF 47uF 0 01 uF 10uF 10uF 1uF 1uF 1uF 1uF 100uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 47UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 0 1UF 100PF 0 1UF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100PF 0 1uF 47uF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 10 10 10 5 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 5 10 20 Remarks 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 35 35V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 35V 16V 50V 50V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 35V 16V 16V 16V 50V 16V 35V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 50V 16V 35V Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks 0842 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP
63. IDE_HD16 32 We KS gt gt AT2DATA 11 VIDEO SIGNAL gt gt PHYSGLK a 22 PHYLREQ IDE A1 33 n AT2DATA 3 CHROMA Y CHROMA BL gt gt PHYLREQ Wr AT2DATA 12 PHYCTL O 34 LM RBIS AT2DATA 2 0 gt gt PHYCTL 0 HW AT2DATA 13 PHYCTL 1 AT2DATA 1 IDE A2 36 TWTRBTZ6 AT2DATA 14 PET AT2DATA O gt gt gt 2 IDE A4 CSO 37 Wa AT2DATA 15 RISM3 4 25 4 26 RD 064 1 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 RD 064 BOARD 2 8 HDD DRIVE NO MARK REC PB MODE A REF NO 20 000 SERIES RB210 RB211 RB212 RB213 47K 47K 47K 47K AT2RESET 22 AT2DATA 7 22 AT2DATA 8 22 AT2DATA 6 22 AT2DATA 9 22 AT2DATA 5 22 AT2DATA 10 22 AT2DATA 4 22 AT2DATA 11 gt gt AT2DATA 3 22 AT2DATA 12 22 AT2DATA 2 gt AT2DATA 13 22 AT2DATA 1 gt AT2DATA 14 22 AT2DATA 0 gt gt AT2DATA 15 22 5 TO 1 8 SA_D1 SA_D14 SA_DO SA_D15 SA_DACK SA_IORDY SA_DREQ AT2DMARQ lt lt 2 x SA_IOW AT2DIOW gt 82 gt SA_IOR E AT2DIOR 55 82 827 SA_IORDY AT2IORDY lt lt 22 gt SA_DACK AT2DMACK 55 82 122 SA INT AT2INTRQ lt lt Wr 22 R231 TIT F AT2ADR 1 gt vw 82 NE _ AT2ADR 0 gt TW 51 W 5 SA A2 AT2ADR
64. INPUT SELECT lt gt A MZ C3001 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V A 1494 643 A RD 064 BOARD COMPLETE SERVICE HX820 C3002 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 16V A 1215 024 A RD 064 BOARD COMPLETE SERVICE HX825 C3004 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V Ref No 20 000 SERIES lt CONNECTOR gt lt CAPACITOR gt CN3004 1 785 828 21 CONNECTOR SQUARE TYPE DV IN C101 1 127 715 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 16V CN3005 1 580 789 22 PIN CONNECTOR SMD 6P 102 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V 103 1 165 887 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 6 3V lt DIODE gt 104 1 164 943 81 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V 107 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O tuF 10 10V D3001 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 D3002 8 719 077 79 DIODE SLR 332VRT32 SYNCHRO REC C109 1 126 246 11 ELECT CHIP 220uF 20 4V D3003 8 719 077 79 DIODE SLR 332VRT32 REC C110 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V D3004 6 500 176 01 DIODE EB3804X TP J555K HDD 111 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V D3005 8 719 084 27 DIODE SLI 343YCT32WST DVD C112 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0O 1uF 10 10V C113 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V lt IC gt C114 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V IC3001 6 706 783 01 BU2050F E2 C115 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V 03002 6 600 500 01 GP1UM28XKOSF C116 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V C117 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0O 1uF 10 10V lt TRAN
65. If the Title List Playlist appears press 2 Select the title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Make a Playlist and press ENTER The selected title is added to the Title List Playlist The title name is the same as the Original title name To play the Playlist title 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original appears press 2 Selecta title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Play and press ENTER Moving a Playlist title Change Order You can change the Playlist title order within the Title List Playlist Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original appears press lt 2 Press OPTIONS to select Change Order and press ENTER Change Order Select the title whose order you want to change 1 Vacation Fri 15 9 gt 2 Journey Sun 17 9 3 Cruising Mon 25 9 4 Yacht Mon 25 9 3 Select the title you want to move and press ENTER 4 Select a new location for the title using and press ENTER Creating and Editing a Playlist Playlist edit allows you to edit or re edit without changing the actual recordings You can create up to 97 Playlist titles Example You have recorded the final few matches of a football tournament on a DVD RW DVD R VR mode You want to create a digest with the goal scenes and other highlights but you also want to keep the original recording Original Playlist
66. Receiver 3 When a set top box receiver is connected to the recorder set it up for the GUIDE Plus system See Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus system on page 26 Press TV GUIDE to exit the GUIDE Plus system To cancel GUIDE Plus settings Press the red button Back To return to the position Press the blue button The cursor returns to the home position on the Grid Note You cannot set Easy Setup Tuner System in the Easy Setup or OSD in the Basic setup to a country region or language that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus system Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information My TV You can set a profile and list up only your favourite programme information Colour buttons t4 ENTER Setting a profile 1 Select My TV in the Menu Bar 2 Press the yellow button Profile BBC2 25 May 10 10 Add Home Use this screen to enter channels categories and keywords for your profile Press A or V to select then press the yellow button to your profile ZO A settings a Profile Settings Channels Categories Keywords Press ENTER to activate your Profile Snld 30109 gt continued 49 Searching for the GUIDE Plus host channel The defaul
67. and go to step 3 Combine the titles in the following order 4 Yacht 3 Cruising Mon 25 9 Mon 25 9 6 Select OK and press ENTER The titles are combined pue gt continued 83 Hint After titles are combined the title name is the title name of the first title prior to combination Note When the number of chapters in the title to be combined exceeds the limit the chapters at the end are combined into a single chapter Dividing a Playlist title Divide HDD D EMS You can divide a Playlist title For operations see page 80 84 Required times for High speed Dubbing from HDD to DVD for 60 minute programme 1 Speed 6x 8 8x 24x High High Rec speed speed id ejj mode DVD DVD Speed speed Double RW pw DVD R DVD R Layer HQ Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 10min 10min 8 min 8 min 25min HSP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 6 min 6 min 5 min 5 min 16min 40 sec 40 sec 40 sec SP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 5 5 min 3 min 3 min 12min 45 sec 45 sec 30 sec LSP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 4 min 4 min 3 min 3 min 10min ESP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 3 min 3 min 2 min 2 min 8 min 20 sec 20 sec 30 sec 30 sec 20 sec LP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 2 min 2 min 2 min 2 min 6 min 30 s
68. and press ONE TOUCH DUB on the recorder The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts recording the tape contents When the recording is finished the recorder rewinds the tape in the digital video camera To stop during recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording 8 When you finish adding scenes press The scene list is displayed DV EDIT Scene List Total 0 00 22 Scenes 1 A _ 0 00 30 0 00 52 OHOOM22S 1 Total duration of the scene Total number of scenes Scene information block 9 Select the scene information block you want to edit using gt and press ENTER The sub menu appears Changes the scene order using lt and ENTER Erase Erases the scene When asked for confirmation select Preview Plays the selected scene To add more scenes press and go to step 4 1 When you finish editing the scene list select OK and press ENTER The display for entering the title name appears To enter a new name select Enter and follow the explanations on page 39 Title Name Enter the title name DV 11 10 03 13 30 12 11 03 16 46 11 Select and press ENTER The title name is fixed and the display asks if you want to start recording To change the disc media select Media and press To change
69. di f e 5 30 dom minimi mice 5 81055 ogge vi ESR 33 0172 IF iub 328 9 nn 2 gt X 2 ac 00 it E LJ C 6 i 2 0 EJ EX T at Lr 1 1 1 lt m 121 10 16 Jc 1006 N 24 C 0 n L Qe X 9 I 0 3 of 1045 p G C om D4 U 25005 si y 1 R1043E D177EZ m m 3 2105030 LINC D LO D 04 LE 610239 E icf e SUL 5 852079 a z 0 O ZA b 2 cso 1 Je gt raj n ul SA JA 1190 DTE 0 RB210 nn 1 414 1 440 413 LJ ENS 1 IU Oc SEE Al 435 910 aa 9 2 o ds ea NAN BERN Vind kl 28 U EN a a IS 4 gt gt EL EX JS JST EL IS J ma E HY ZZ zx RY227 ajai O E E a r LL Li 26 5 HDD DRIVE V DEC FLASH ROM AV CN POWER DV PHY PLL AUDIO AD DA HDMI RD 064 RDR HX820 HX825 SECTION 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5 1 IT CONTROL
70. discs is as follows HQ I hour 48 minutes HSP 2 hours 42 minutes SP 3 hours 37 minutes LSP 4 hours 31 minutes ESP 5 hours 25 minutes LP 7 hours 14 minutes EP 10 hours 51 minutes SLP 14 hours 28 minutes Notes The maximum continuous recording time for a single title is eight hours Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the recording time Recording a programme with poor reception or a programme or video source of low picture quality Recording on a disc that has already been edited Recording only a still picture or just sound Note To receive from the recorder a programme position that can be received by either the set top box receiver or the recorder change the input source in step 4 Disabling programme positions If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels you can hide them For instance if you are using your set top box receiver to receive programme data connection B page 15 all receivable programme positions are displayed Use this function to hide any unwanted programme positions 1 Select Editor in the Menu Bar and press ENTER 2 In the left column select the programme position you want to hide or display using 3 Press the red button On Off The disabled positions will turn grey To show the disabled positions press the red button On Off again Q Notes You cannot record a programme positio
71. executed as shown below Factory Check Aging test in the same way as in the factory When the key 6 is pressed down the Write Registration Code will be executed as shown below Write Registration Code Writing the DIVX Registration Code When the RETURN key is pressed down the monitor display will return to the menu screen 6 4E HDD MODE 1 Indicate ID 3 4 5 6 2 Peformance Check Write 10 Format Factory Check Write Registration Code RDR HX820 HX825 SECTION 7 ADJ USTMENTS 7 1 Video System Adjustment Preparing for Adjustment 1 Equipments Oscilloscope Reference Disk HLX 507 PAL single layer disc 6090 077 HLX 506 PAL dual layer disc J 6090 078 A 1 Video Output Level Check lt Purpose gt This check is made to satisfy the PAL signal standard If it is adjusted incorrectly brightness will be too bright or too dark Mode PLAY Signal 100 Color bars Test point Output VIDEO connector terminated 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p 0 07 Vp p Fig 7 1 7 1 2 S Video Output S Y Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the S video Y signal output has the rated amplitude If it adjusted incorrectly the playback video signal will not be displayed
72. you can select a recording format VR mode or Video mode according to your needs page 77 90 21529 14613 Tg ENTER OPTIONS mouy 0 uyay 1 Insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER Example When a DVD RW is inserted Disc Information Media DVD RW Close Disc Name Finalise Format Disc Name Date 13 10 2006 28 10 2006 Title no 3 HQ 0H30M HSP 0H45M SP 1 00 LSP 1H15M ESP 1H30M LP 2HOOM EP 3H00M SLP 4HOOM Remainder 2 3 4 7GB Select Format and press ENTER Select and press ENTER For DVD RWs and unrecorded DVD Rs Video mode select VR or Video and press ENTER contents on the disc are erased R GW gt continued 43 44 46 Hint By reformatting you can change the recording format on DVD RWs or record again on DVD RWs that have been finalised Note On this model 1 GB read gigabyte is equivalent to 1 billion bytes The larger the number the larger the disc space Info Shows information when available Editor Allows you to edit the channel lineup and channel display page 52 Setup Allows you to change the language country region postal code input source or host channel 5 Home position When
73. your screen when output in progressive mode 50 or 60 frames per second the progressive video signal needs to be converted to match the type of DVD software that you are watching You can fine tune the progressive 525p 625p video signal that is output when you set Progressive Output to On Note that you must connect to a progressive format TV using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks page 17 Auto Automatically detects the software type Film based or Video based and selects the appropriate conversion mode Normally select this position Video Fixes the conversion mode to the mode for Video based software Q Note When picture noise appears after you set the recorder to progressive format hold down and press PROGRAM minus on the unit 1 25 Video Settings Video Video settings will adjust items related to the image such as size and colour Choose the settings according to the type of TV tuner or decoder connected to the DVD recorder 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Video and press ENTER The Video setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined co d SETUP Basic Video Output Video Scart Setting Audio Pause Mode Recording Colour System DVD Auto Display Others Screen Saver Easy Setup Video Output TV Type S
74. 10V C1011 6 3V C1012 10V C1013 16V C1014 16V C1015 6 3V C1028 10V C1029 10V C1030 6 3V C1031 10V C1032 16V C1033 10V C1034 10V C1035 10V C1036 16V C1037 8 14 Part No 1 128 934 91 1 125 777 11 1 127 772 81 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 128 993 21 1 128 993 21 1 124 779 00 1 124 779 00 1 127 715 91 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 127 715 91 1 127 715 91 1 127 715 91 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 127 715 91 1 127 715 91 1 127 715 91 1 164 943 81 1 127 715 91 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 165 908 11 1 137 710 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 127 715 91 1 165 88 91 1 164 943 81 1 165 908 11 1 164 943 81 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMI
75. 10uF 10uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 100PF 220PF 100PF 220PF 100PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 9PF 9PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 5PF 0 5PF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 10 Remarks 16V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 10V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 50V 16V 50V 16V 50V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 50V 50V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V 16V 6 3V 10V 10V 10V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V Ref No C606 C607 C608 C609 C610 C611 C612 C614 C615 C616 C617 C618 C619 C620 C622 C623 C625 C626 C701 C702 C703 C704 C705 C706 C707 C708 C710 C711 C712 C713 C714 C715 C716 C803 C804 C805 C806 C807 C808 C809 C810 C811 C812 C813 C816 C817 C901 C902 C903 C904 C905 C906 C907 C908 C909 C910 C911 C912 C913 C914 Part No
76. 11 1 218 865 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 813 11 1 216 807 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 839 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 838 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 833 11 1 218 875 11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP META
77. 16W R249 1 16W R250 1 16W R252 1 16W 258 1 16W R261 1 16W R265 1 16W 267 1 16W R269 1 16W 270 1 16W 272 1 16W R274 1 16W 276 1 16W 279 1 16W R282 1 16W R303 1 16W R304 1 16W R305 1 16W R306 1 16W R307 1 16W R308 1 16W R312 1 16W R313 1 16W R314 1 16W R315 1 16W R316 1 16W R317 1 16W R318 1 16W R322 R323 1 16W R325 R328 329 1 16W R336 8 16 Part No 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 938 11 1 219 965 11 1 218 962 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 953 11 1 216 964 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 949 11 1 218 989 11 1 218 953 11 1 208 709 11 1 218 941 11 1 216 964 11 1 216 964 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 977 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 957 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 Description SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP
78. 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 12PF 12PF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Remarks Ref 10V C219 10V C220 10V C222 10V C223 10V C224 10V C230 10V 0231 10V C232 10V C233 10V C234 10V C235 10V C236 10V 237 10V 0301 10V C302 10V C303 10V C304 10V C305 10V C308 10V C309 10V C310 10V 0311 10V 0312 10V C313 10V 0314 10V 0315 10V 0316 10V C317 10V C318 10V C319 10V C320 10V 0321 10V C322 6 3V C323 10V C324 10V C325 10V C326 10V C327 10V C328 10V C329 10V C330 10V 0331 10V C332 10V C333 10V C334 10V C335 10V C336 10V C337 16V C338 50V 0339 50V 0340 16V 0501 10V C502 10V C505 6 3V C506 10V C601 10V C602 10V C603 16V C604 16V C605 8 13 Part No 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 165 887 91 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11
79. 2 SA_CSO AT2CS 0 gt gt 223 ES SA CS1 AT2CS 1 gt HDD DRIVE RD 064 2 8 4 27 KSA_D13 SA_D2 K_SA_D12 C201 0 1u saops SA_D11 C202 18 SA_D10 B 0 05 2 SA_D9 KSA_D6 2 SA_D8 2 KSA_D7 0 6 SA XRST 3 4 C224 0 01u B 16V CL201 UAO 1202 UAI 1203 33V 10 11 12 13 14 SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL 15 16 AUDIO CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL Z r 8258 x 1k I 6 a m e 3 4 SA_CS0 2 0 34 5 SA CS1 H CS N1 0 H_PDIAG_N er UAO 4 C214 12201 VDDIO e HDD DRIVE ue 0 1 VDD 5 B C217 CN203 88548040 1 000 5 A AS 17 JL202 B T6 2 O 227 SN WN BH 2 HT ua a o ele T4 5 JL204 0 01 4 GND UNIT 8 Z lt lt 5 HR 8 6 HR b 5 1240 7 GND e 00 LO 5 9 9864 gt 5 te x JO eR Ese ee xs 3 C230 C231 C232 81382 oS 0 01 ooti or 3 R282 0 M lt lt XSYSRST gt BYE FB201
80. 216 809 11 1 218 289 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 218 871 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 0 100 5 0 10K 5 470 5 0 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 510 5 0 2 2K 5 2 2K 5 10K 5 100 5 10K 5 10K 5 470 5 0 HX825 100 5 10K 5
81. 220 100 16V PLL AUDIO AD DA 4 37 4 38 RD 064 7 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 18 19 Re RD 064 BOARD 8 8 at HDMI NO MARK REC PB MODE A REF NO 20 000 SERIES R REC MODE PESE 12 gu lt lt 81929 51515 4 585 ALAA 5 lt lt SW3 4VC a 8 8 RINT i 2 ET 5 5 a 2 g 8 QOO M6 UNSWAV 0 L8 81903 33 1 i 17 0 5 8 unt 3 0 SCALC3 0 SCALC2 0 SCALCI 16 HDMI RD 064 8 8 REC656CLKO gt Rage REC6560 REC6560 REC6560 REC6560 REC6560 REC6560 REC6560 REC6560 Noo A SPDIFOH gt 1901 2 5V REG SPDIFOH 1 902 SCALER 1C902 CXD9836R O N amp O SCALY3 SCALY2 D13 D12 D11 D10 SCALY1 i SCALYO Pe Bag Ce Dek 0 POZAN ps SCALB7 04 SCALEG 06 SCALB5 on Kii 3 3 H 7 Exe
82. 4 0 1 8 5 8 lt _ 22 z Q312 i MUTE CONTROL BC857CE6327 XLMUTE 2 OPTICAL OUT TO 5 8 lt XP_AMUTE 22 306 XRMUTE BCR148 E3627 C318 _ BASIS baw 220u AUDIO OUT AV 106 3 8 4 9 4 10 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 A AV 106 BOARD 4 8 TUNER 10 000 SERIES NO MARK REC PB MODE D TU_AFT TU lt lt 5x TU AUTOP TO 5 8 TU MAX TU 6 MAX 4 TU PCONT 22 JL404 TU MAX TU_AUTOP 10 11 TU401 TUNER 1 2 13 14 15 16 TU_SCL 22 TO 5 8 6 8 7 8 TU SDA gt 16 KKA lt lt lt UNSW6V T gt SIGNAL PATH IN VIDEO SIGNAL OUT 5 AUDIO s CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL gt o 5 ta o gt gt lt lt gt D a 30V REG 1C401 L401 TK11819MTL L403 10uH JUL401 ARP 8475 19 0 R420 AS 0 ow 100 R1417 A 00 00 L402 L404 co 10uH 10uH T 405 C409 C401 0 1u R409 C407 0 1u C410 ES 4ru B 1k 10u B 10u 0 1u 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V B R418 0 001u B C414 L405 i D1401 BAS16 03W 10uH 00 38 d 8422 R423 a R1406 05400 01408
83. 4 gt ENTER button 25 d RETURN button 78 OPTIONS button 43 PAGE e e gt buttons 35 73 previous next DAY buttons 68 21 411 1 2 gt gt gt search slow freeze frame buttons 68 22 C gt play button 66 II pause button 68 stop button 66 The gt button has a tactile dot DISPLAY button 37 REC button 33 REC STOP button 33 3 6 SYNCHRO REC button 63 REC MODE button 33 25 TV 2 volume buttons 22 TV on standby button 22 TV PROG programme buttons 22 The button has tactile dot button 22 Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder Clock Programme position TV Direct Rec indication 33 appears in the right most two digits 5 NICAM indicator 55 6 TV indicator 33 Disc type angle indicator 66 1 AERIAL IN OUT jacks 13 2 HDMI OUT high definition multimedia interface out jack 17 20 3 LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L VIDEO jacks 17 20 4 LINE 2 OUT S VIDEO jack 17 5 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y PB CB PR CR jacks 17 126 8 6 LINE 3 DECODER jack 15 AC IN terminal 21 LINE 1 TV jack 17 9 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL OPTICAL jack 20 G LINK jack 13 Front panel
84. 5 1 10W R1720 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W FB3101 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 1721 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 FB3102 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD R1722 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 lt 16 gt R1735 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R1736 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W 103101 8 759 643 83 uPD16315GB 3BS 1738 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R1800 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W lt JACK gt R1801 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 J3101 1 780 049 11 TERMINAL BOARD 5 TERMINAL 3P lt THERMISTOR gt lt COIL gt TH601 1 805 074 11 THERMISTOR L3101 1 412 537 31 INDUCTOR 100uH TUNER UNIT FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE ANTU401 8 597 559 00 TUNER FSS BTF DF441 ND3101 1 519 849 21 INDICATOR TUBE FLUORESCENT VIBRATOR TRANSISTOR X602 1 813 700 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 10MHz X603 1 813 698 11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 32 768kHz 03101 8 729 901 88 TRANSISTOR 25 2411 X1101 1 781 589 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL HX825 03102 8 729 901 88 TRANSISTOR 25 2411 X1401 1 813 713 31 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 18 432MHZ V RESISTOR gt FL 166 BOARD COMPLETE R3101 1 218 285 11 METALCHIP 75 5 1 10W LEAR EARS NN R3102 1 218 285 11 METALCHIP 75 5 1 10 Ref No 30 000 SERIES R3103 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R3104 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 lt CAPACITOR gt R3105 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 03103 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 5 50V R3108 1 218 285 11 METAL CHI
85. 63 Recordto Records to the HDD HDD Recordto Records to DVDs DVD Auto Chapter Selects whether to automatically divide a recording a title into chapters during recording or dubbing Inserts chapter marks at approximately 6 minute intervals Ea No chapter mark is inserted Q Notes The actual chapter mark interval may vary depending on the amount of information contained in the video to be recorded Chapter marks are automatically inserted where the recordings start on the tape when Auto Chapter is set to during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode pue sumag 107 108 110 Disc Settings DVD The DVD setup allows you to adjust parental control language and other DVD related settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select DVD and press ENTER The DVD setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined co N 2 SETUP Basic 4 Parental Control Video Language Audio Format DVD RW VR Recording One Touch Dubbing DVD Others Easy Setup Parental Control DVD VIDEO only Playback of some DVD VIDEOS can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users Scenes may be blocked or replaced with different scenes 1 Select Parental Control
86. 8 AV 106 BOARD 7 8 n S8 0 8 A JL802 EURO IN OUT REF NO 10 000 SERIES gt FSW gt 20 Tote 8 5 8 RE 10u 50V TK11250CMCL G 1 801 R REC MODE 8845 P PB MODE 5V REG 5 m 5 B 83 C835 R858 5 PPS Yam cau 75 gt gt EURO_INT 5 95 21 lt AVLINK 0803 m u gt gt 50V BEAT TZ a R871 p D81 Al c bo NNCD3 9F T1 50 44 43 28802 G o S a3 e x 5 0802 5 2 o0 0 Z x x 5 5 gt gt lt 5 D803 un STZ6 8N T146 1134 DGND2 Ba x AUX_CVBS Y UDZSTE 176 2B ad UDZSIE 27138 2 TEST1 D C FS AUX C CVBS Y OUT to AUX D804 CR R 22 ENC C crim NNCD3 9F T1 1 vG RE AGND2 CB B FSL1 0805 O VIDEO IN OUT 807 NNCD3 9F T1 1 3 3 L3B lt lt GR R C OUT to AUX zi TO 6 8 ENC R FB815 L3G TO AVCC2 D806 03 L3RC lt lt 86 PARALLEL1 0808 s 2 STZ6 8N T146 STZ6 8N T146 C 650 DTA114TKA T146 T FB 16 5 VY AD cnm BSG BH7626KS2 CVBS Y OUT H1 SWITCH iu 8874 C845 i AU2INR AU2INR B 100k 220p T 6849 E 52 AU2INL 22 Ez ma B OUT to L1 0 20 220 10 lt alata
87. 8 729 010 05 8 729 010 05 8 729 010 05 1 218 939 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 973 11 Description IC CXD9836R IC MB95F108ASPFV GE1 5G00 IC SN74LVC1G08DCKR IG TK11218CMCL G IG TK11233CMCL G TK11133CSCL G TK 0550SCL G lt COIL gt INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR lt TRANSISTOR gt TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR lt RESISTOR gt RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP 10uH 10uH 10uH 10uH 10uH 10uH 10uH 4 7uH 10uH 10uH MSB709 RT1 MSB709 RT1 MSB709 RT1 MSB709 RT1 MSB709 RT1 MSB709 RT1 MSB709 RT1 68 5 68 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 1K 5 0 0 47 5 22 5 0 0 10K 5 2 2K 5 2 2K 5
88. 990 81 1 218 941 81 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP 47 47 47 47 47 4 7 47 4 7K 22 22 68 10K 22 10K 47 22 22 1 5K 1 5K 22 22 150 150 220 4 7K 4 7K 22 22 1K 22 100 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 16W R205 1 16W R206 1 16W 207 1 16W 208 1 16W R209 1 16W R210 1 16W R211 1 16W R212 1 16W R213 1 16W R214 1 16W R223 1 16W R224 1 16W R225 1 16W R226 1 16W R227 1 16W R228 1 16W 229 1 16W R231 R233 237 1 16W 238 1 16W R240 1 16W R243 1 16W R245 1 16W R246 1 16W 247 1 16W R248 1
89. B 10V u lt A P 01402 4140 MSD601 RSTI C1409 C1410 C1411 C1412 1500 SIKAME 0 1u 10u 3 3u R B 50 50V B TO 1 8 H GND T 22 16402 PQ1MX55M2SPQ R1452 100k 1u 0 5 17 TU_VIDEO TUNER AV 106 4 8 0401 847 6327 41403 BUFFER 4 11 0403 MSD601 RT1 BUFFER R411 100 W R412 100 NW 7 01401 MSB709 RT1 SIF AMP 61401 C1402 47 0 1u 25V B AHVSUP 61419 NC 2 3 JL1406 1401 sci our L 5 Ez 2 3 JL1407 EURO MSP SC1 OUT R C1418 MSP3417G QG B8V3 B NC 01400 BAS16 03W The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark AA are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 4 12 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 TU_AFT
90. Basic Clock Present Time Set the time and date manually Sun 1 1 2006 0 00 D Press 44 to set day and press gt Set the month year hour and minutes in sequence Press to select the item to be set then press 44 to set the numbers The day of the week is set automatically To change the numbers press to return to the item to be changed and press 4 4 6 Press ENTER to start the clock 050 0 5 Display Switches the display language on the screen Progressive Output If your TV accepts progressive 525p 625p format signals set Progressive Output to You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and high quality images 1 select Progressive Output and press ENTER 2 Select and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 3 Select Start and press ENTER The video switches to a progressive signal for 5 seconds 4 Ifvideo signal appears OK select Yes and press ENTER If picture is distorted select and press ENTER Progressive Mode DVD software can be divided into two types film based software and video based software Video based software is derived from TV and displays images at 25 frames 50 fields 30 frames 60 fields per second Film based software is derived from film and displays images at 24 frames per second Some DVD software contains both Video and Film In order for these images to appear natural on
91. C 2 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons then select OK and press ENTER DVD Parental Control Standard USA Password 3 Select Standard and press ENTER The selection items for Standard displayed DVD Parental Control Level Standard Password USA Others 4 Selecta geographic area as the playback limitation level and press ENTER The area is selected When you select Others press the number buttons to select and enter an area code in the table page 127 Then select and press ENTER Factory Setup Allows you to select the setup settings by group and return them to their default settings Note that all of your previous settings will be lost 1 select Factory Setup in Others and press gt or ENTER The display for selecting a group of settings appears 2 Select the group of settings you want to return to default from Basic Video Audio Recording DVD Others Parental Control and All and press gt or ENTER 3 Select Start and press ENTER The selected settings return to their default settings 4 Press ENTER when Finish appears Format You can erase all titles recorded on the HDD 1 27 5 Select Level and press ENTER The selection items for Level are displayed DVD Parental Control Level
92. CHIP 5 6K 5 1 10W C136 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3017 1 216 832 11 METAL CHIP 8 2K 5 1 10W 137 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V 138 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O tuF 10 10V R3018 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W R3019 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W C139 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3020 1 216 827 11 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 1 10W C140 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3023 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W C141 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3024 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W C142 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V 143 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O tuF 10 10V 8 12 0144 0145 0146 0147 0148 0149 0150 C151 C152 C153 C154 C155 C156 C157 0158 0159 0160 C161 C162 C163 C164 C165 C166 C167 C168 C169 C170 C171 C172 C173 C174 C175 C176 C177 C188 C189 C190 C191 C192 C193 C194 C195 C196 C197 C198 C199 C201 C202 C203 C204 C205 C206 C207 C208 C209 C210 C214 C215 C217 C218 Part No 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 1
93. DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CN103 3P CN101 15P GND SW12V ND z AV 106 BOARD SW6v SW6V SW6V W5V ISW6V ISW4V sway SW4V NSW 8V BES E Quv0d 01 09 08 15 8 8 os s E io ses 4 4 4 4 1 e Z 2 ala 9 gt 5 5 gt gt olo Sj S 5 ciu Sola N E C A N N gt gt ala 5 5 qas puma Le S quw px cc gt gt olo S 499038 160301 A QN ANB E E 24 60301 z qe ASYM 21 NON 20 1LNOV 7 E HNIV N9nv 12 15 5 E 5 Sj aj S gt gt BOARD TO BOARD i 19 13 o RD 064 BOARD ovn n sn dm own avv 048 a amx 041046 041048 deb 7090 609 0 5 N9 41 40 GND PMSNN ZAYMSNN a a z 5 a z 5 AVMSN AVMSN AvMSNN AVMSN PMSNN br be pe le pe
94. DVD 2 Press PROG to select the programme position or input source you want to record 3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode Each time you press the button the display on the TV screen changes as follows HSP gt SP SLP lt LP lt ESP For more details about the recording mode see page 54 gt continued 33 Title List with Thumbnail Images Example DVD RW 1 LIST 1 14768 eH 2 12 Tennis 5 4 Thu 20 4 2006 13 00 LSP 0 968 3 11 Travel 4 Mon 10 4 2006 21 00 0H30M ESP 0 3GB 10 Mystery Sun 2 4 2006 9 00 1H00M SLP 0 8GB Extended Title List TITLE LIST 12 Tennis 11 Travel 10 Mystery 5 2 4 9 World Sports Thu 30 3 8 Family 28 3 7 Nature Sat 25 3 6 News Mon 20 3 5 4 ae Weather Wed 15 3 World Sports Disc type Displays the media type HDD or DVD Also displays the title type Original or Playlist for HDD or DVD RW DVD R VR mode disc titles 1 mouy 0 21509 14613 2 Disc space remainder total Title information Displays the title number title name and recording date Title size is shown in the Thumbnail title list red Indicates that the title is currently being recorded Indicates that the title is currently
95. IDE 4 50 51 IDE_RST CSE IDE DACK IDE DRE IDE IORD IDE DE D14 0A33 als als 031 091 1SH 031 idan NG SIHIS n 2 5 AG MOd 14 QN9 LI GNS LI dS 209 2 E pg MS ZS NI ZA N9 NY NI Z9 4 N9 NI ZA ND NY N9 nv NI ZH 0N9 5 138 55 056 55 SS3NuVH FA 118 HARNESS RF 119 HARNESS DGND n TPB TPA DGND e e z o 257 BOARD zla gt 5165 006N9 2 FL_POW_6V 2 u M e ot FLR 008 FFC KEY0 El IT_GND FR_5V LED_CK FLD_STB LED_DT IT_GND CN3102 8 FL 6V FL 166 BOARD dOL 101620 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 2 4 1 RDR HX820 HX825 4 2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS In addition to this the necessary note is printed in each block For schematic diagrams e capacitors are in uF unless otherwise noted pF uuF 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums All resistors are ohms 1 4 W Chip resistors 1 10 W un less otherwise specified 10000 MQ 1000kQ Caution when replacing chip parts New parts must be attached after removal of chip Be caref
96. Laboratories Dolby and double D symbol trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 2 DTS and DTS Digital Out are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc 2 With the TV I O button pressed down enter the TV s manufacturer code using the number buttons For instance to enter 09 press 0 then 9 After you enter the last number release the TV VC button Code numbers of controllable TVs If more than one code number is listed try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV Manufacturer Code number Sony 01 default Hitachi 24 JVC 33 Panasonic 17 49 Philips 06 08 Samsung 71 Sanyo 25 Thomson 43 Toshiba 38 The remote performs the following Buttons Operations TV Turns your TV on or off TV volume Adjusts the volume of your TV PROG Selects the programme position on your TV Switches your TV s input source To operate the TV DVD button for SCART connections only The TV DVD button switches between the recorder and the last input source selected on the TV Point your remote at the recorder when using this button When you connect the recorder to the TV via the SCART jacks the input source for the TV is set to the recorder automatically when you start playback To watch another source press the TV DVD button to switch TV s input source Step 4 Con
97. Level 1 Level 2 or Joliet format for the recorder to recognize the MP3 tracks DivX is a video file compression technology developed by DivX Inc This product is an official DivX Certified product You can play DATA CDs and DATA DVDs that contain DivX video files You can also play discs recorded in MultiSession Border See the instructions supplied with the disc drives and the recording software not supplied for details on the recording format Note on MultiSession Border discs If audio tracks and images in Music CD format or Video CD format are recorded in the first session border only the first session border will be played back Q Note The recorder may not be able to play some DATA CDs DATA DVDs created in the Packet Write format 1 18 Playing MP3 Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files or DivX9 Video Files You can play MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files on DATA CDs CD ROMSs CD Rs CD RWs or JPEG image files and DivX video files on DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs AUDIO SUBTITLE eg sv gt ENTER OPTIONS e 4 _ OG5O G e 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files or DivX video files that the recorder can play The recorder can play the following tracks and files MP3 audio tracks with the extension mp3 JPEG image f
98. Make sure the SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the front panel page 63 gt The equipment is not connected to the LINE 3 DECODER jack of the recorder gt The recorder is connected to the TV output jack of the connected equipment Synchro Recording does not complete gt The timer setting for the connected equipment overlapped the recorder s timer setting page 64 gt There was a power failure during the recording uoneuuojuj jEuonippy gt continued 117 The disc tray does not open and LOCKED appears in the front panel display gt The disc tray is locked Cancel the Child Lock page 67 The disc tray does not open and TRAY LOCKED appears in the front panel display gt Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility The disc tray does not open and you cannot remove the disc after you press open close gt Turn off the recorder Once the clock appears in the front panel display disconnect the mains lead If the recorder does not turn off or if the clock does not appear in the front panel display disconnect the mains lead anyway Connect the mains lead again while pressing down amp on the recorder and release the button when the disc tray opens Then keep on the recorder pressed for about ten seconds until WELCOME appears in the front panel display RECOVERY appears in the front panel display gt The recorder s re
99. NI IC302 C 4 Q605 4 qu 10502 6 0606 4 EM IC602 4 0607 C4 SL 2 STE 00 IC802 4 H136 qi fn Ms 223 5 Ja ME O aja olojo ojo ER RD 064 BOARD SIDE R oO R10157 aiiiiiiiiiii um um M DEAD CO 133 ht CETT29 0111321 m 2p1116 DETTO 5 um um HN um um um su su su sm A CT99 mnm 4 51 RISM3 HDD DRIVE V DEC FLASH ROM AV CN POWER DV PHY PLL AUDIO AD DA HDMI RD 064 RDR HX820 HX825 Uses unleaded solder RD 064 BOARD SIDE B CN606 e 6 6 8 RD 064 BOARD SIDE RZ spora ROG E 095 D NEWEJCACI Bos us Bling ER Ej AMMA 112 C ouo GR m 202 D 00 IC301 LE a 884325883 a 401 B E72 1544 3 546 4 4 2 5 IL _ 7 81003 af 009 53S 2 EB ume EOD 3 5 gt isnt bum Ju 54 V a LE LI E 5 S 0577 Hn ATI 1 e e s wma COATS ZN 8516
100. OF CONTENTS SERVICE NOTE 1 DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED FORCED EJECTION 5 2 BOARDS CONNECTION GR 6 1 GENERAL WARNING Qa 1 1 dtes c 1 1 Quick Guide to Disc Types mH IH a ee 1 2 Hookups Settings oreet het a AE 1 3 Hooking Up the Recorder mH 125 Step 1 Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box 1 2 Step 2 Connecting the Video Cords HDMI Cord 1 4 Step 3 Connecting the Audio Cords 1 5 Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead 4 4 1 5 Step 5 Preparing the Remote swisi ono 1 5 Step 6 Easy Setup 1 6 Connecting a VCR Similar Device 127 Connecting a PAY TV Canal Plus Analogue Decoder 1 7 Eight Basic Operations Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder 1 8 1 8 2 Recording a Programme mH 1 8 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List 1 8 4 Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information 1 9 5 Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme 1 9 6 Labelling and Protecting Disc m HMM 1 10 7 Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment Finalise 1 10 8 Reformatiing 1 10 GUIDE POS EN 1 11 Introduction to the GUIDE Plus System 1 11 Watching
101. Oo HDACKO gt DEIDSNTPoornooxog oti gt 3 HDREQ1 FERERZRARASARARAZSZCUGOJCE S lt 25 EA 81050 0 A6 HDREQO KKSKKKSKAKAKAKAKZEOSUECSC G 3 eee anand AAA AA AANA AAA AAA AA A A NAJAAAAKODYO R181 J EEEE e 0 10 DADR 12 zj 52 3 3V REG 1 0 0 DADR 11 4 58 9 DBA1 1 1 6 DADR 9 E a DADR 10 1 0 DADR 8 4 1 0 DADR 7 z i DADR 6 w w B 4 cx n K ssa sw3 4v 55 75 28112 ov unsw3v gt gt gt Dun S GND gt 0110 127 0125 100u Gu R1051 1034 _ oOo 0 1u u u 1k 0 22u n B 10V 4 b B 0 22 6561 0 2 INT 2 lt lt INT 2 IDE_RST lt REC656I 0 REC6560 7 C za RECESS 29 REce56otgl 768 548 22 FSEL lt lt REC656I 1 REC6560 6 5 REC6560 6 L lt lt 768 548 REC656I 2 REC6560 5 REC6560 5 lt lt A768FS441K lt lt REC656I 2 5 4 gt 1 mi 22 ALRCKO REC656I 3 Z REC6S6I 3 gt REC6560 4 REC6560 3 R1031 gt ADATAO REC656I 4 gt REC6560 3 lt lt AOLRCKI lt lt REC656I 4 REC6560 2 6560121 POS REC6561 5 T0 3 8 REC6560 1 22 lt lt AOBCKI lt lt REC656I 5 5 REC6560 1 656 6 REC6560 0 5 REC6560 0 lt REC656I 6 REC656CLKO REC
102. R1931 1 16W R1932 1 16W R1933 8 18 Part No 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 990 81 1 219 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 961 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 956 11 1 218 956 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 216 864 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 977 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES C
103. R665 R666 R701 Part No 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 962 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 962 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 942 11 1 218 942 11 1 218 942 11 1 218 942 11 1 218 942 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 951 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 951 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 951 11 1 208 952 81 1 208 955 11 1 208 713 11 1 208 911 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 797 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 949 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 949 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 216 821 11 1 218 990 81 1 208 911 11 1 208 911 11 1 208 911 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 Description RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT
104. Recording From Connected Equipment HDD CUTS 9 9 9 pvp INPUT SELECT ety 909 ENTER AJ e OPTIONS REC gt e ep REC MODE REC SYNCHRO REC Recording from connected equipment with a timer Synchro Rec You can set the recorder to automatically record programmes from connected equipment that has a timer function such as a satellite tuner Connect the equipment to the LINE 3 DECODER jack of the recorder page 28 When the connected equipment turns on the recorder starts recording a programme from the LINE 3 DECODER jack 1 Before recording select HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a recordable DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Set Synchro Rec to Record to HDD or Record to DVD in the Recording setup page 107 gt continued 63 64 66 3 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select L3 4 select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Press OPTIONS to select Line Audio Input and press ENTER Then select Bilingual and press ENTER For details about bilingual recording see page 55 D Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode For details about the recording mode see page 54 6 Set the timer on the connected equipment to the time of the programme
105. Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Audio and press ENTER The Audio setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined N d SETUP Basic Audio Off Video Audio Connection Audio Audio DRC Recording Downmix DVD Others Standard Dolby Surround Easy Setup Audio ATT attenuation If the playback sound is distorted set this item to The recorder reduces the audio output level This function affects the output of the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 1 TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack On Select this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted Off Normally select this position Audio DRC Dynamic Range Control DVDs only Selects the dynamic range difference between soft and loud sounds setting when playing a DVD that conforms to Audio This affects the output from the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE I TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL HDMI OUT jack only when Dolby Digital is set to page 104 Standard Normally select this position TV Mode Makes low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down Wide Gives you the feeling of Range being at a live performance Downmix DVDs only Switches the method for mixin
106. System on page 50 Disconnect the mains lead from the mains and connect it again PDC VPS Scan Off was selected in the OPTIONS menu page 62 The programme contains copy protection signals that restrict copying Other timer setting overlapped the timer setting page 63 VV VM The recorder automatically starts recording when the satellite receiver is turned on gt The Synchro Rec function was activated Turn off the satellite receiver and cancel the Synchro Rec function page 63 You dubbed a title but the title did not appear in the HDD Title List gt The title contained a copy protection signal so it was moved page 87 High speed dubbing is not possible gt The title cannot be dubbed at high speed page 86 Even if erasure is performed so that a title does not contain mixed picture sizes it is still treated as a title with mixed picture sizes Display The clock has stopped gt Set the clock again page 100 gt The clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour Reset the clock page 100 The TIMER REC indicator is flashing gt The disc does not have enough space gt Insert a recordable disc inside the recorder gt The inserted DVD is protected page 41 The recording mode indication is incorrect gt When the recording or dubbing is less than ten minutes or if a picture with little movement is displayed for more t
107. TV using the GUIDE Plus System 1 11 Searching for a Programme using the GUIDE Plus SN 1 12 Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information MT ooo oco OP AA 1 12 Making changes to the GUIDE Plus System e 1 12 Timer Recording e O 1 12 Or 1 13 Timer Recording GUIDE Plus Show View Manual 1 14 Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings eee 1 15 Recording From Connected Equipment 1 15 2 1 16 OO AA WE 1 16 Searching for a Title Chapter Track etc 9 1 18 Playing MP3 Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files or Div Xi Video 1 18 Efasine and Editing ee ed A 1 19 UR tte 1 19 Erasing and Editing a Title A 1 19 Creating and Editing a Playlist A 1 20 Dubbing HDD DVD RH e n 1 21 Before onum dede 1 21 1 22 ________________ _ 1 22 Before DV 1 22 Recording an DV Format One Touch Dubbing EWA 1 03 Prostam 2 1222 Settings and Adjustments SUO POE EE 1 24 Aerial Reception and Language Settings Basic 1 24 Video Settings Video A 1 25 Audio Settings metere a 1 26 Recording Settings Recording HH 1 26 Dise Settings DVD intendentes A AAA 1 27 Remote Control Settings Factory Settings Others 1 27 Easy Setup Resetting the Rec
108. To adjust the recording quality See step 3 of Adjusting the recording picture quality and size on page 60 Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Rec Mode Adjust of the Timer Settings to On in the Recording setup page 107 Auto Title Erase HDD only If there is not enough space for a timer recording the recorder automatically erases old titles recorded on the HDD The oldest played title is erased Set Auto Title Erase of the Timer Settings to in the Recording setup page 107 Protected titles are not erased If the timer settings overlap If one or more timer settings overlap a message appears To change the timer settings see Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 X Hint If you are recording to the HDD ora DVD RW VR mode at a recording mode that is SP or lower and is a 2x speed or higher disc you can play the title as itis being recorded by selecting the programme title on the Title List page 71 Q Notes fa message indicating that the disc is full appears on the screen change the disc or make available space for the recording HDD DVD RW DVD RW only page 79 The last recording mode you selected manually becomes the default recording mode for timer recordings made from the GUIDE Plus system You
109. a programme from My TV 1 Select My TV in the Menu Bar and press ENTER The programmes that match the profile conditions are displayed Select a programme using lt 4 gt and press ENTER To set a programme for timer recording See One Button Recording GUIDE Plus page 56 Searching for a Programme using the GUIDE Plus System Colour buttons s ENTER 1 Select Search in the Menu Bar and press ENTER Press ENTER to search for Movies Highlights Press or V for other sub categories Press 4 to search ___ the My Choice category Press P to search the Sport category Grid Schedule My Choice Movies Sport Action Animation Comedy Drama Romance Sci Fi Thriller 2 Select a category using lt gt and press ENTER To search for a programme by keyword select My Choice You can search for all programmes that contain the keyword in the programme s title and in the programme s Information Box If no keywords are displayed enter the keyword See enter a new keyword below 3 Select sub category using and press ENTER Programmes that meet the conditions are listed up The sub categories differ according to country region Making changes to the GUIDE Plus System o OG Number Q buttons Colour buttons C
110. agi R REC MODE 22 EE P PB MODE 2 5V REG HADRS 7 1C108 HADRS 8 2200 6124 MM1762FHBE 9 B Voltage measurement of HADRS 12 the CSP IC and HADRS 13 EEPROM the Transistors with HADRSI TH RB171 172 RB173 174 HADRS 15 mark is not possible HADRSH6 47k 47k 47k 47k T HADRS 17 747 111 nir K4H511638C UCB3T HADRS 18 HADRS 19 2 5 HADRS 20 0 1 1 rows HADRS 53 DADRS 12 RT DADRI12 du 775 HADRS 24 8 gt g s SAS DADRS 111 DADR 11 16 04 PT DDT2 30 xr ioco I 0 0210 I0 Y BAT O C0 Ts o iS ONO DADRS 9 1 1 DADRI 9 1 1 1 1 HADRS 29 5555545554555555555554 nananana 55 5505 588 5555393995395958558558 SRR Ac 5 p HADRS 30 VDD25 8819 RB111 RB189 VSS 7 22 DDT2 16 22 04 2 DDT2 28 vod tug DADRS 6 24441 DADRI6 NORHWSJ 0 VDD33 Ga DADRSIB 4 DADRI5 DDT2 20 DDT2 27 NORHOE PXCLK kB19 lt 9 j 120 4 4 REC656Y 2 9 6813 9 167 8 0 i ER 7 REC656H fci 9 8g E B odu ARA JL169 DDT2 26 HDATA 15 4 RE665615 gt RECG5GI A DDT2 2
111. an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phonbe must choose between two unexpected Z gt BBC2 P02 10 00 120Min fil OSSA Search MyTV Schedule Tue 25 10 00 10 30 m ONE Flimbles Starship rwo Friends This Alias This Sally Jessy Raph Our b five Armageddon News at Ten i t 2 Football Emmerdale Homes Polic gt w 2 25 1010 Promotional 4 Panel 4 gt gt gt The Secret 2 selecta programme using lt 4 gt and press ENTER The GUIDE Plus system disappears and the programme position changes to the selected programme Learning the common elements Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Home Screen appears BBC2 25 May 10 10 8 Record Channels Home Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rache s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for 1 Emma while Phonbe must choose between two unexpected E P02 10 00 120Min a My TV Schedule 10 30 Starship This Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go Promotional Panel Armageddon News at Ten Football Emmerdale The Secret
112. and gt PLAY button at the same time connect the AC power cord to the power outlet Keep pressing the above buttons until a message WELCOME appears on the display panel of the main unit While the diagnostics is in progress either appears on the monitor screen to enable the judgment whether the respective devices or the peripheral are normal or have any abnormality When an abnormality is detected the diagnostics 1s stopped at that moment and you can select to keep running the diagnostics or to stop it 6 1 Check Item Checking item ICname When NG is displayed as the result of the DEVICE TEST the IC or EEPROM IC BR24L32FJ WE2 1 102 its peripheral is defective VIDEO DEC IC TVP5146M2PFP 01 ICK4H511638C UCB3T 12105 DDR IC K4H511638C UCB3T 12106 parts are mounted on the RD 064 board 6 1 6 2 Screen Transition in the Service Mode MAIN MENU lt lt MAIN MENU gt gt 1 Version No lt lt Version No gt gt MODEL 6 6 6 Region Code SYSCON Version HDMI Check sum lt RETURN gt lt lt Display Color gt gt 1 White Signal ON 2 White Signal OFF 2 Display Color 3 Total 2 0 G code OSD Setting Menu lt RETURN gt MODEL kkk SYSCON Version HDD Serial ID HDD Sony ID lt RETURN gt lt lt Total gt gt 1 Total Power ON 2 T
113. be cancelled once started Do you still wish to proceed 4 select and press ENTER The recorder starts finalising the disc Hint You can check whether the disc has been finalised or not If you cannot select Finalise in step 3 above the disc has already been finalised Q Notes Depending on the condition of the disc recording or the DVD equipment discs may not play even if the discs are finalised The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc if it was recorded on another recorder 1 10 Q Note You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD s disc name The disc name may not appear when the disc is played on other DVD equipment Protecting a disc 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears Available settings differ depending on the disc type Example When the inserted disc is a DVD RW VR mode 1 Disc Information Close DVD RW Format Media Disc Name Disc Name Date 13 10 2006 28 10 2006 Protect Disc Title no Original 3 Playlist 5 HQ 0H30M HSP 0H45M SP 1 00 LSP 1H15M ESP 1H30M LP 2H00M Remainder 3HooM SLP 4H00M Format Finalise 2 3 4 7GB 1 amp On
114. being dubbed Indicates the protected title NEW Indicates that the title is newly recorded not played back HDD only 522 Indicates titles containing Once copy protection signals HDD only page 87 4 Scroll bar Appears when all of the titles do not fit on the list To view the hidden titles press 4 9 5 Title s thumbnail picture The still images for each title are displayed gt continued 35 36 38 3 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears The sub menu displays options applicable only to the selected item The displayed options differ depending upon the model situation and disc type LIST 1 1 4 7GB Close Play Play Beginning Erase Protect Dubbing Title Name A B Erase 12 Tennis Thu 20 4 2006 13 00 01 11 Travel Mon 10 4 2006 21 00 0 10 Mystery Sun 2 4 2006 9 00 1 Sub menu 4 select Play and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title To change the title order Sort While the Title List menu is turned on press OPTIONS to select Sort Titles Press 44 to select item and press ENTER To turn off the Title List Press TITLE LIST Hints After recording the first scene of the recording the title is automatically set as the thumbnail picture You can select TITLE 1157 from the System Menu Notes T
115. edit the title after stopping playback you change the settings on the recorder you turn off the recorder VIDEO CD CD DATA DVD DATA CD only you make a recording except for HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode you disconnect the mains lead Q Note You cannot resume playback during TV Pause To play restricted DVDs Parental Control If you play a restricted DVD the message you want to temporarily change the Parental Control level to appears on your TV screen 1 Select OK and press ENTER The display for entering your password appears 2 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons 3 Press ENTER to select OK The recorder starts playback To register or change the password see Parental Control DVD VIDEO only on page 108 1 Press the pause or play button on the connected equipment to cancel the playback pause status The connected equipment starts playback and the playback image is recorded by this recorder To stop recording press M REC STOP on this recorder If you connect a digital video camera with a DV IN jack See DV Dubbing on page 91 for an explanation of how to record from the DV IN jack i Hint You can adjust the settings for the recording picture before recording See Adjusting the recording picture quality and size on page 60 Q Notes When recording a video game image the screen may not be clear Any programme that c
116. enough space for a timer recording the recorder automatically erases old titles recorded on the HDD Set Auto Title Erase in the Recording setup to page 107 The oldest played title is erased Protected titles are not erased If the timer settings overlap If one or more timer settings overlap a message appears To change the timer settings see Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 Recording TV programmes using the ShowView system The ShowView system is a feature that simplifies setting the timer Just enter the ShowView programming number listed in the TV programme guide The date time and programme position of that programme are set automatically Check that the programme positions are correctly set in Programme Setting in the Basic setup page 96 o 9 G9 buo O Sooo Colour buttons SCHEDULE bod e ENTER _ STOP 1 With the GUIDE Plus system turned off press SCHEDULE 2 Press the red button ShowView BBC2 25 May 10 10 8 Cancel Home Please Enter the PlusCode programming number and press ENTER to confirm A EZ LL R Grid Search a No programmes Media Freq Mode HDD Once HQ 3 Press the number buttons to enter the ShowView programming number If you make a mistake press a
117. equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits set out in the EMC Directive using a connection cable shorter than 3 metres On safety Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet unplug the recorder and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further About the hard disk drive The hard disk has a high storage density which enables long recording durations and quick access to the written data However it can easily be damaged by shock vibration or dust and should be kept away from magnets To avoid losing important data observe the following precautions Do not apply a strong shock to the recorder Do not place the recorder in a location subject to mechanical vibrations or in an unstable location Do not place the recorder on top of a hot surface such as a VCR or amplifier receiver Do not use the recorder in a place subject to extreme changes in temperature temperature gradient less than 10 C hour Do not move the recorder with its mains lead connected Do not disconnect the mains lead while the power is on When disconnecting the mains lead turn off the power and make sure that the hard disk drive is not operating the clock is displayed in the front panel display for at least 30 seconds and all recording or dubbing has stopped Do not move the recorder for one minute after you have unplugged the mains lead
118. is recorded in multiple sound tracks such as a tape with multiple sampling frequencies 48 KHz 44 kHz or 32 kHz no sound or an unnatural sound will be output when playing back the sampling frequency switch point on the disc In order to use this recorder s Auto Chapter setting page 93 94 be sure to correctly set the clock on your digital video camera before shooting The recorded picture may be momentarily affected or the start and end points of a title may be different from what you have set if the source DV Digital8 format tape is in any of the following conditions In this case see Recording from connected equipment without a timer page 65 There is a blank space in the recorded portion of the tape The tape s time code is not sequential If the picture size or the recording mode on the tape being dubbed changes 2 Select DV EDIT and press ENTER The display asks if you want to start selecting scenes Scene Selection Do you want to select a scene If you have previously saved a program the display asks if you want to edit an existing program or to create a new program To resume editing the existing program select Saved Data and go to step 9 3 Select Start and press ENTER The display for setting the IN point start of the scene appears The scene starts to play DV EDIT Set IN point M IN _ 0 00 15 UT gt Controlling
119. number name Shows either track number track name scene number or file name for CDs VIDEO CDs DATA DVDs or DATA CDs suoieiadg 21529 14613 m 7 E lt lt J rJ i a CD gt continued 37 Press lt 4 gt to select the character you want to enter and press ENTER The selected character appears at the top of the display Example Input Title Name Input Title Name Omi 12 FIE Ccara 9 Symbol ME _ ob The type of characters will change according to the language you select in Easy Setup Some languages allow you to enter an accent mark To enter a letter with an accent mark select an accent followed by the letter Example Select 7 and then to enter To insert a space select Space Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the remaining characters Input row Input TitlelName 0000 FA se Jot 3 8 o Symbol see Jokke erase a character move the cursor to the right of the character at the input row Select Back and press ENTER To insert a character move the cursor to the right of the point where you want to insert the ch
120. only with part number specified 8 7 0807 0808 01104 01401 01402 R102 R104 R107 R108 R111 R113 R114 R115 R118 R120 R121 R122 R135 R137 R140 R142 R144 R146 R148 R154 R160 R161 R162 R168 R169 R170 R173 R174 R175 R176 R218 R219 R222 R223 R224 R225 R226 R227 R304 R305 R306 R307 R308 R309 R310 R311 R312 R313 R314 R315 Part No 6 550 683 01 8 729 027 24 8 729 045 17 8 729 010 05 8 729 010 29 1 216 296 11 1 218 911 11 1 218 895 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 833 11 1 218 896 11 1 218 875 11 1 218 869 11 1 216 797 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 885 11 1 218 873 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 864 11 1 216 296 11 1 216 296 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 296 11 1 216 296 11 1 216 296 11 1 216 296 11 1 218 879 11 1 218 879 11 1 218 871 11 1 218 871 11 1 218 863 11 1 218 863 11 1 218 863 11 1 218 863 11 1 216 849 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 830 11 1 218 864 11 1 218 864 11 1 218 864 11 1 218 864 11 1 218 865 11 1 218 865 11 Description TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR lt RESISTOR gt SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHI
121. peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long so be careful e Strong viscosity Unleaded solder is more viscous sticky less prone to flow than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins etc Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder SAFETY CHECK OUT After correcting the original service problem perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer 1 Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly soldered connections Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges 2 Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires pinched or contact high wattage resistors 3 Look for unauthorized replacement parts particularly transistors that were installed during a previous repair Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement 4 Look for parts which through functioning show obvious signs of deterioration Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement 5 Check the B voltage to see it is at the values specified 6 Flexible Circuit Board Repairing Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 C during repairing Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board within 3 times Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering TABLE
122. press ENTER The recorder starts finalising the disc After finalising the disc will be ejected automatically 42 6 Labelling and Protecting a Disc You can execute options effective for the entire disc using the Disc Information display et ENTER OPTIONS Labelling a disc 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears Available settings differ depending on the disc type Example When the inserted disc is a DVD RW Disc Information Media DVD RW Close Disc Name Finalise Format Disc Name Date 13 10 2006 28 10 2006 Title no 3 HQ 0H30M HSP 0H45M SP 1H00M LSP 1H15M ESP 1H30M LP 2H00M EP 3H00M SLP 4HOOM 7 Remainder 2 3 4 7GB 3 Select Disc Name and press ENTER Enter the disc name in the Input Disc Name display page 39 Finalising the disc using Disc Information display 1 insert disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears 3 Select Finalise and press ENTER The display shows the approximate time required for finalising and asks for confirmation Example DVD RW Finalise About XX min is needed to finalise this disc Finalisation cannot
123. returns to normal playback Notes For DVD RWs VR mode this function does not work when recording on a Ix speed DVD RW in the HQ or HSP recording mode The DVD s picture on your TV screen freezes for a few seconds when you fast forward fast reverse or instant replay advance the recording Chasing Playback is possible from one minute or more after recording starts Even if you fast forward the recorded programme there will always be a time difference of about one minute or more between the recorded programme and the current TV broadcast Playing a previous recording while making another Simultaneous Rec and Play HDD GD CUT EN n re m Simultaneous Rec and Play allows you to view a previously recorded programme while recording programmes Playback continues even if a timer recording starts Use this function as follows While recording to the HDD Play another title on the HDD Play a previously recorded programme on a DVD by pressing DVD 2 Select an item and press ENTER The adjustment display appears frame noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal BNR block noise reduction Reduces block noise or mosaic like patterns in the picture mosquito noise reduction Reduces the faint noise appearing around the outlines of the images The noise reduction effects are automatic
124. selections select Reset 1 2 3 Dub Selected Titles 0 2 8 8 Select title s in the order Co you want to dub them Cancel 1 1 World Cup Final Wed 1 11 2 World Tour Asia 1 6 11 3 World Tour Asia2 Wed 10 11 4 World Tour Asia 3 Thu 16 11 615 1 Total size of the selected titles This is displayed in red when the size exceeds the available space on the dubbing target media Direction of dubbing Available space on the disc to be dubbed approximate 4 PL Indicates a Playlist title DV Dubbing Before DV Dubbing This section explains dubbing with a digital video camera via the DV IN jack on the front panel If you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks see Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 65 The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the i LINK standard Follow the instructions in Preparing for DV dubbing and then move on to the section on dubbing For more information about i LINK see About i LINK on page 123 Preparing for DV dubbing Youcan connect a digital video camera to the DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a DV Digital8 format tape Operation is straightforward because the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape for you you do not need to operate your digital video camera Do the following to start using the DV Edit fun
125. the HDD The oldest played title is erased Set Auto Title Erase of the Timer Settings to in the Recording setup page 107 Protected titles are not erased 1 Press TV GUIDE BBC2 25 May 10 10 Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rache s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for ______ Emma while Phonbe must choose between two unexpected 2 10 00 120Min H My TV Schedule Tue 25 10 00 10 30 P ONE Flimbles Starship Channels gt Friends gt This Alias This gt gt gt Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go Armageddon News at Ten Football Emmerdale The Secret Homes Polic gt w 2 Select a programme using lt 4 gt search for a programme by category or by keyword select Search in Menu Bar See Searching for a Programme using the GUIDE Plus System on page 48 for more information about searching for a programme You can select a programme from TV 3 Press the red button Record The set programme and Time Slot change colour and the recorder is ready to start recording When recording from a set top box receiver be sure to turn it on Unlike a VCR there is no need to turn off the recorder befor
126. the dubbing mode select Dub Mode and press t Hints If you set Finalise Disc of One Touch Dubbing to Auto in the DVD setup page 109 the recorded disc except DVD RW VR mode will automatically be finalised after recording is finished You can play back a previously recorded title on the HDD while One Touch Dubbing is in progress Q Notes When a blank space between the recordings on the tape continues for more than five minutes One Touch Dubbing ends automatically The recorder records a blank for five minutes before it stops dubbing To stop the blank recording press REC STOP Data capacity required for the dubbing This is displayed in red when the size exceeds the available space on the dubbing target media DV Dubbing 2 1GB fm gt 4 628 Change the dubbing mode if necessary Select Start to start dubbing Media Dub Mode DVD SP 2 1GB 12 Select Start and press ENTER The recorder starts recording the tape contents as programmed To stop during recording Press B REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording To automatically adjust the dubbing mode If there is not enough available space on the target disc the recorder automatically selects a dubbing mode with lower picture quality according to the available space The same dubbing mode is set for all of the titles If disc space is insufficient for the
127. tracks and JPEG image files only the JPEG image files are played back when D gt is pressed To stop playback or slideshow Press To pause playback or slideshow Press To play the beginning of the MP3 audio track or DivX video file Press OPTIONS to select Play Beginning and press ENTER To fast forward or fast reverse an MP3 audio track or DivX video file Press lt lt during playback To go to the next or previous MP3 audio track JPEG image file or DivX video file Press I lt lt 4 or gt gt during playback If you repeatedly press 4 or BI you will go to the next or previous album Except JPEG image file To play DivX video file in slow motion one frame at a time Playback direction only Press in pause mode To go to the next or previous album Except for DivX video files Press 4 gt during playback or slideshow To display the registration code for this recorder Select Registration Code in the Others setup page 110 gt continued 73 About playback order of albums tracks and files Albums play in the following order Structure of disc contents Tree 1 Tree2 Tree3 Tree4 Tree5 Album MP3 audio track JPEG image file DivX video file When you insert a DATA CD DATA DVD and press C gt numbered tracks or files are played sequentially from through O For JPEG image files press to go to the next
128. turn a channel On blue or Off grey and identity its Source and Programme Number Press Y to use Press 4 to view info Press to view Setup Schedule info Lis Name On Off Source Prog No BBC1 On Tuner BBC2 _ Tuner 02 ITV Off Ext Rec 1 P 103 ITV Tuner P 03 CH4 1 P 104 CH5 Ext Rec 1 P 105 SKY1 Rec 1 106 BBC3 Off Ext Rec 1 115 Iva On Rec 1 P 226 Press ENTER Press gt to move the cursor to the right column N 4 Select the programme position you want to check using change the input source press the red button Source To change the programme position see Programme Setting on page 96 Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the recording modes To select the HQ mode set Setting of the HDD Rec Settings to in the Recording setup page 107 HQ records pictures in higher quality than HQ on the HDD Note that HQ appears as HQ in the front panel display and the on screen displays Approx recording Recording mode time hours HDD DVD HQ High quality 20 HQ 1 32 1 5 1 46 1 hr 30 min SP Standard mode 61 2 LSP 77 2 hr 30 min ESP 93 3 LP 124 4 187 6 SLP Long duration 249 8 The recording time for DVD R DL Double Layer
129. weak 3 0 3 strong Brightness dark 3 0 3 bright Colour light 3 0 3 deep Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other items Hint You can also extend the recording time while recording by pressing OPTIONS and selecting Extend Rec Note The new settings become effective when you exit the GUIDE Plus system About the PDC VPS function PDC VPS signals are transmitted with TV programmes in some broadcast systems These signals ensure that timer recordings are made regardless of any broadcast delays early starts or broadcast interruptions To use the PDC VPS function Select VPS PDC in step 7 above When you turn on this function the recorder starts scanning the channels before the timer recording starts If you are watching TV when scanning starts a message will appear on the TV screen If you want to watch TV switch to your TV s tuner or turn off the PDC VPS channel scan function Note that if you turn off the PDC VPS channel scan function the timer recording will not start To temporarily turn off PDC VPS channel scan Press OPTIONS and select PDC VPS Scan Off To ensure that the PDC VPS function works properly turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts This will automatically turn on the PDC VPS channel scan function while the recorder remains off Q Notes f one programme contains two picture sizes the selected size is recorded Howeve
130. you press the blue button the cursor returns to the last programme position on the Grid 6 Tiles Shows the programme titles and category green sports purple movies blue children s teal others 7 Broadcast station Logo Shows the broadcast station logo 8 Time Slot Indicates the currently selected time slot Use to select a different time slot Troubleshooting guide If you are having trouble displaying the television programme list please check the following Your country region and postal code must be set correctly page 25 The clock must be set correctly If the clock 15 not set set it manually page 100 This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus data several times a day when the recorder is turned off standby mode Turn off the recorder when you are not using it for example at night After initial setup page 25 it may take up to 24 hours for your recorder to start receiving programme listings It may take up to one day to receive all seven days of TV programme listings Check the following if the programme guide data has not been received after waiting for a day Easy Setup page 25 is finished The host channel is not disabled see Disabling programme positions on page 53 The timer is not set If the programme guide data still cannot be received after checking the above search for the host channel at the follow
131. your TV with some or all of the buttons below If you enter a new code number the code number previously entered will be erased Number buttons eG TV DVD TV WI amp TV PROG 1 Hold down the TV I O button located at the bottom of the remote Do not press the button at the top of the remote t Hint For correct speaker location see the operating instructions supplied with the connected components Notes Do not connect your TV s audio output jacks to the LINE IN R AUDIO L jacks at the same time This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV s speakers With connection do not connect the LINE IN R AUDIO L and LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks to your TV s audio output jacks at the same time This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV s speakers With connection after you have completed the connection make the appropriate settings under lt Easy Setup Audio Connection page 25 Otherwise no sound or a loud noise will come from your speakers When you connect the recorder to an AV amplifier receiver using an HDMI cord you will need to do one of the following Connect the AV amplifier receiver to the TV with the HDMI cord Connect the recorder to the TV with a video cord other than HDMI cord component video cord S VIDEO cord or audio video cord 1 Manufactured under license from Dolby
132. 0 1uF 10 16V 6617 47uF 20 16V C618 150PF 5 50V 0619 5 uH uH RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms METAL metal film resistor METAL OXIDE Metal Oxide film resistor F nonflammable SEMICONDUCTORS In each case u for example uA UPA UPA UPB HPC 8 4 Part No 1 164 217 11 1 164 739 11 1 164 739 11 1 164 218 11 1 164 218 11 1 124 589 11 1 124 589 11 1 128 398 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 162 927 11 1 164 230 11 1 164 230 11 1 165 908 11 1 107 826 11 1 124 589 11 1 115 339 11 1 124 261 00 1 107 826 11 1 115 339 11 1 124 261 00 1 107 826 11 1 124 589 11 1 124 584 00 1 107 826 11 1 162 915 11 1 107 826 11 1 115 416 11 1 115 416 11 1 115 416 11 1 115 416 11 1 162 970 11 1 162 968 11 1 107 826 11 1 124 589 11 1 162 910 11 1 162 908 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 124 589 11 1 162 970 11 When indicating parts by reference number please include the board name The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAM
133. 0 POWER BLOCK 2 Connector Four tapping screws CN2 BV 3 x 8 4 Tapping screw BV 3 x 10 Power block 2 6 2 11 AV 106 BOARD Four tapping screws BV 3 x 8 P 4 RD bracket __ 2 Tapping screw BV 3 x 10 Connector 43 Connector Five tapping screws CN3 BV 3 x 8 9 Connector CN 701 45 AV 106 board Flexible flat cable FAR 005 602 amp 71 9 Seven tapping screws BV 3 x 10 gt _ 19 Screw R 9 B 6 2 2 12 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION Power block AV 106 board f FL 166 board RD 064 board FR 257 board 2 8E SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3 1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM AV 106 BOARD J702 LINE 2 OUT 5 VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L AUDIO R VIDEO AMP SELECTOR TU401 J703 AERIAL TUNER TU VIDEO VCY gt t ns COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y CB CR RECVY RECCCR AUDIO SIF gt EURO MSP 1401 TU SCL TU SDA 18 432MHz gt Y C Y G CR R CB B Y CB CR RECVY RECCCR Y C Y G CR R CB B 5 mm 5 5 5 mm mm mm z m z ma M me KS EEP ROM FR 257 BOARD 1 2 sooo REMOTE COMMANDER RECEI
134. 00 TUNER FSS BTF DF441 106 1 474 022 11 POWER BLOCK Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark AA are critical for safety 8 3 Replace only with part number specified 8 2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE Due to standardization replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set XX X mean standardized parts so they may have some difference from the original one Items marked are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items e CAPACITORS uF Ref No 0105 0106 0107 0108 0114 0117 0118 0119 0120 0123 0124 0125 0127 0128 0129 0130 0131 0134 0135 C151 C155 C159 C160 C209 C210 C211 C212 C213 C214 C215 C216 C217 C218 C301 C304 C306 C307 C308 C309 C310 Part No 1 109 982 11 1 137 710 11 1 107 726 91 1 100 966 91 1 165 908 11 1 162 927 11 1 162 970 11 1 100 591 91 1 100 591 91 1 126 947 11 1 128 396 11 1 100 966 91 1 107 826 11 1 162 962 11 1 137 710 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 124 584 00 1 100 966 91 1 107 726 91 1 124 589 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 100 966 91 1 100 966 91 1 100 966 91 1 100 966 91 1 162 923 11 1 162 923 11 1 124 589 11 1 125 972 91 1 124 234 00 1 115 467 11
135. 01 INDICATOR TUBE FLD DRIVE IR CONT RDR HX820 HX825 TMDS DATA CLOCK 12902 oe OUT SCALER C901 IDE D0 D15 AND GATE DVD ADE A0 A4 UNIT gt HDD DATA 0 15 HDD DRIVE X201 25MHz DDATA 0 31 wonse gt 0105 106 256Mbit 10 DDR EEPROM SUPER AND HDATA 0 15 128Mbit HADRS 6 31 HCS 0 PHYDO 0 7 D101 VDAC3 3V 0 701 24 576MHz SWITCHING REGULATOR i SRV 2001EK SW12V SW5V POWER wswiv REGULATOR UNSW6V UNSW12V UNSW6V UNSW 8V UNSW 8V UNSWAV 4 AC IN 3 2 TPA TPB FR 257 BOARD 2 2 oo gt RDR HX820 HX825 3 2 J3101 5 VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO L MONO acti AUDIO R LINE 2 IN AV 106 BLOCK DIAGRAM P M MAZAN i L BOARD 1 06 0 702 o WIDE SEL 11702 CVBS OUT 61 y LINE 2 OUT SELECTOR 1 cour Q9 LSVIDEO Y I _ 48 CVBS1 sv OUT B L V
136. 02 R201 PR1003 A 006 UNSW 4V 16V GND P602 UNSW 8V Zo Q S10K300 m C114 A AE 16501 T3 15A 250V dL SHUNT REGULATOR CN101 Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified SWITCHING REGULATOR 4 41 4 42 SRV 2001EK RDR HX820 HX825 4 3 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS LINE 2 OUT DIGITAL OUT AERIAL Uses unleaded solder COMPONENT IN OUT VIDEO OUT LINE1 TV HX825 only AV 106 BOARD SIDE A AV 106 BOARD SIDE A CN101 GN103 oporo X1401 10 0 1 1 co 1 W WO PO PO W CO CO CO Cc N m Co amp amp A A A do ro NI 11 90 4 43 POWER AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT IT CONTROLLER VIDEO IN OUT EURO IN OUT IR CONT 106 RDR HX820 HX825 AV 106 BOARD SIDE B AV 106 BOARD SIDE B Uses unleaded solder 0608 6 7 0702 A 0714 6 0715 A 5 0721 A 5 0724 6 0728 5 0731 4 0732 M4 N gt W O gt gt ONW PAY
137. 0832 16V C833 16V C834 16V C835 6 3V C836 16V C837 6 3V C838 16V C839 25V 0840 16V 0841 8 5 Part No 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 947 11 1 126 947 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 165 908 11 1 126 947 11 1 107 726 91 1 126 964 11 1 126 964 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 104 658 91 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 104 658 91 1 126 947 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 162 927 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 947 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 162 927 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 947 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
138. 1 1 216 821 11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 100K 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100K 100K 10K 220 100 1M 75 75 75 75 100 100 75 100 100 75 75 100 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 10W R1105 1 10W 1 10W R1106 1 10W 1 10W 1107 1 10W R1108 1 10W 1 10W R1110 1 10W 1 10W R1111 1 10W 1 10W R1115 1 10W R1116 1 10W 1 10W R1120 1 10W R1132 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W R1133 1 10W R1134 1 10W 1 10W R1139 1 10W 1 10W R1140 1 10W R1141 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W R1142 1 10W R1143 1 10W R1144 1 10W R1145 1 10W 1 10W R1146 1 10W 1147 1148 1 10W R1401 1 10W R1402 1 10W R1403 1 10W R1406 1407 1408
139. 1 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 137 710 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 852 11 1 164 852 11 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 837 91 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0
140. 1 10W R1409 R1410 R1411 1 10W R1412 1 10W R1416 1 10W 1417 1 10W 1418 1 10W R1419 1 10W R1451 1452 1 10W R1453 HX625 R1454 1 10W HX625 R1601 R1602 R1603 R1604 R1609 8 10 Part No 1 216 821 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 029 00 1 216 819 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 029 00 1 216 829 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 029 00 1 216 821 11 1 216 823 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 819 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 846 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 821 11 1 218 895 11 1 218 905 11 1 218 885 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 847 11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 1K 2 2K 150 680 1K 1K 0 HX8
141. 1 164 874 11 1 164 882 11 1 164 874 11 1 164 882 11 1 164 874 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 849 11 1 164 849 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 151259 1141 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 137 710 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 137 710 11 1 165 989 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 0 01uF
142. 1 Press 4 4 to select an available TV system BG DK I or L To receive broadcasts in France select PLZ 12 Select Channel using lt gt Basic Programme Setting EN Prog System Channel Name NB Audio AFT 1 Ci AAB off On 2 51 Standard 5 Off NICAM v 13 Select the PAY TV Canal Plus analogue programme position using 4 4 or number buttons 14 Select using lt gt Basic Programme Setting As Prog System Channel Name Audio AFT 1 BG cl NICAM 2 51 Standard C5 FGH Off NICAM 15 Select On using and press ENTER To return to the previous step Press 4 RETURN Q Note If you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected decoder 4 Press REC Recording starts Recording stops automatically after 8 hours of continuous recording or when the HDD or DVD is full To stop recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for recorder to stop recording To record the entire programme Programme Rec Press OPTIONS to select Programme The current programme that you are watching will be recorded Recording automatically stops when the programme ends To watch another TV programme while recording I
143. 111 2502411 146 155355 1 7 13110 o T3101 3300 0 03191 me DC DC CONVERTER 1SS355TE 17 TRANSFORMER A Eo ex J reins C3114 AN AU Co 50V 50V Y RET soy C3106 D3108 201 2012 100u 155355 17 C apy s 5 03109 113111 7 155355 17 03102 03120 25 2411 146 gt E CH 3 1 3126 GR10 GRD10 O R3115 SEDI 103101 GR11 on GRD11 5 27k AD EOKA gt FL DRIVER GR12 68012 B En PT6315 VEE 8 EA LED4 153101 5616 SH SEG16 D OSC CSP CHIP SIZE PACKAGE IC 5615 01302 SDL301 7 E J3101 R3103 03102 1 STZ6 8N T146 31 CN3101 10 3 U E o 1 O do al al a E AV 106 T A BSB 6 8 C3118 S VIDEO IN GN701 oin B THROUGH THE 118 55 ga 4 15 1 LINE IN2 j VIDEO i R3108 t D310 AUDIO L 83109 STZ6 8N T146 G MONO gt 7 0 2W A 5 AW CN3102 8P UN AUDIO R gt gt 2 PBS IOI FB3102 s Xn LED CK STZ6 8N T146 A FLD_STB LED_DT E IT GND CN3001 D3107 s THROUGH THE STZ6 8N T146 H FR_5V EE EFC is IT GND H SIGNAL PATH SEE PAGE 4 23 FL_POW_6V VIDEO SIGNAL SIGNAL R3113 PB 220k FL DRIVER LINE2
144. 13T1 SCO AA SET z 3 VA_PCONT gt OSG C615 sa aT Sep iy gt 4 A T isl 5154 a SEE SYNCRO DET U gt a gt a gt otu oF F 6 5 6 5 x U amp lt lt SYNCRO_DET lt 9 lt 2x 525 m i z 25025 555 lt 5855 25555 lt lt S2SW 5 9 2222 gd 15 amp b ZA dau QQ INSEL_PCONT SY INSEL PCONT CN601 11 ANEXO ONDO E E RZE 58 ge CVIN1 100 DIAG SIRCS 5 1 5 22 ABER dr VA PCONT lt ZCVIN1 DIAG 1 Rie 100 RMTIN SIRCSIN lt e lt 11 PCONT SVREF lt ZSVREF 19 5 1 D rx 2 NISE_TX JSTIN JUST_CLK AVLINK_IN lt P12 TU_PCONT_2 3 SYNCIN NISE_RX 0 0 1 TU_AUTOP lt lt SYNCIN 3 6 SOUT3 FLD DATA PIS AUTO PRESET 1 3 HDET JL601 160 0 5 TU PCONT lt HDET IT GND 4 SIN3 FLD IN P14 TU_PCONT VSYNC JLG02 5 1 1 9 EURO INT lt lt VSYNC os LE side Y NE lt lt XP_VMUTE XIT_RST 6 n AW BYTE _INT4 SYNC_V_2 lt 6 5 0 cNvsS 7 9 CNVSS INTS SYNC V 143 gt gt xPAMUTE gt 18 2 6 M2 8 XCIN P20 BS_VOL_DET FSW dme ITSDI5 e lt lt FSW gt 20 ro e 8 7 8 sH TXD2 9 XCOUT P21 BS PCONT EURO INT E SH RXD2 10 7 ITSDOS SRESET P22 BS_DEC sw RESETSY lt lt EURO INT e 41608 ITSCK5 1 8 EAE 55 AVL
145. 1517 Swahili 1059 Bulgarian 1235 Interlingua 1369 Nepali 1521 Tamil 1060 Bihari 1239 Interlingue 1376 Dutch 1525 Telugu 1061 Bislama 1245 Inupiak 1379 Norwegian 1527 Tajik 1066 Bengali 1248 Indonesian 1393 Occitan 1528 Thai Bangla 1253 Icelandic 1403 Afan Oromo 1529 Tigrinya 1067 Tibetan 1254 Italian 1408 Oriya 1531 Turkmen 1070 Breton 1257 Hebrew 1417 Punjabi 1532 Tagalog 1079 Catalan 1261 Japanese 1428 Polish 1534 Setswana 1093 Corsican 1269 Yiddish 1435 Pashto 1535 Tonga 1097 Czech 1283 Javanese Pushto 1538 Turkish 1103 Welsh 1287 Georgian 1436 Portuguese 1539 Tsonga 1105 Danish 1297 Kazakh 1463 Quechua 1540 Tatar 1109 German 1298 Greenlandic 1481 Rhaeto 1543 Twi 1130 Bhutani 1299 Cambodian Romance 1557 Ukrainian 1142 Greek 1300 Kannada 1482 Kirundi 1564 Urdu 1144 English 1301 Korean 1483 Romanian 1572 Uzbek 1145 Esperanto 1305 Kashmiri 1489 Russian 1581 Vietnamese 1149 Spanish 1307 Kurdish 1491 Kinyarwanda 1587 Volap k 1150 Estonian 1311 Kirghiz 1495 Sanskrit 1613 Wolof 1151 Basque 1313 Latin 1498 Sindhi 1632 Xhosa 1157 Persian 1326 Lingala 1501 Sangho 1665 Yoruba 1165 Finnish 1327 Laothian 1502 Serbo 1684 Chinese 1166 Fiji 1332 Lithuanian Croatian 1697 Zulu 1171 Faroese 1334 Latvian 1503 Singhalese 1174 French Lettish 1505 Slovak 1181 Frisian 1345 Malagasy 1506 Slovenian 1703 Not specified Area Code For details see page 108 Code Area Code Area Code Area Code Area 2044 Argentina 2165 Finland 2362 Mexico 2149 Spain 2047 Australia 217
146. 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref No R935 R937 R938 R939 R940 R941 R942 R945 R946 R948 R950 R951 R953 R954 R955 R956 R957 R968 R973 R974 R977 R978 R983 R985 R986 R987 R988 R989 R990 R991 R993 R994 R995 R1001 R1002 R1003 R1004 R1005 R1006 R1007 R1008 R1009 R1010 R1011 R1012 R1014 R1015 R1016 R1017 R1018 R1019 R1020 R1021 R1022 R1023 R1024 R1025 R1026 R1028 R1030 Part No 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 961 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 961 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 961 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 220 179 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 962 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 Description RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CH
147. 2 2K 5 2 2K 5 0 33 5 0 22 5 22 5 0 22 5 0 0 47 5 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref No R138 R139 R140 R141 R142 R143 R145 R146 R147 R148 R149 R150 R153 R154 R155 R156 R157 R158 R160 R161 R162 R163 R164 R165 R166 R167 R168 R169 R170 R171 R172 R173 R174 R175 R176 R177 R178 R179 R180 R181 R182 R183 R184 R185 R186 R187 R188 R189 R190 R191 R192 R193 R194 R195 R196 R197 R198 R199 R203 R204 Part No 1 218 973 11 1 216 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 208 699 11 1 218 973 11 1 208 699 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 208 687 11 1 208 687 11 1 208 643 11 1 208 643 11 1 208 663 11 1 208 663 11 1 208 663 11 1 208 663 11 1 208 663 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 945 11 1 216 945 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 933 11 1 208 699 11 1 208 699 11 1 208 699 11 1 208 699 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 953 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218
148. 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 33 1005X4 68 1005 4 68 1005 4 68 1005 4 68 1005 4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 2010 4 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 8 19 Ref No RB159 RB171 RB172 RB173 RB174 RB175 RB182 RB183 RB184 RB185 RB189 RB190 RB191 RB192 RB193 RB194 RB195 RB196 RB201 RB202 RB203 RB204 RB205 RB210 RB211 RB212 RB213 RB219 RB220 RB221 RB222 RB223 RB301 RB302 RB501 RB502 RB503 RB504 RB505 RB602 RB 01 RB702 RB703 5901 VDR901 VDR902 VDR903 VDR904 VDR905 VDR906 VDR907 VDR908 VDR909 VDR910 Part No 1 234 400 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 400 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 380 21 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 242 962 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 379 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 378 21
149. 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD TRANSISTOR FB819 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0101 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTOR UN2213 FB820 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD Q301 8 729 424 08 TRANSISTOR UN2111 FB821 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD Q302 8 729 921 80 TRANSISTOR 29D1781K 1146 QR FB822 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD Q303 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 FB824 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP Q304 8 729 045 17 TRANSISTOR 258156111000 FB1608 1 469 775 21 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0305 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTOR UN2213 FB1609 1 469 775 21 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0306 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTOR UN2213 Q307 8 29 02 53 TRANSISTOR DTC124TKA T146 I6 0308 8 729 027 53 TRANSISTOR DTC124TKA T146 0309 6 551 287 01 TRANSISTOR 2502704 1146 1102 6 702 889 01 SI 3033KS TL 1104 6 708 913 01 TK 3400AU3G0L C 0310 6 551 287 01 TRANSISTOR 2502704 1146 0107 6 707 208 01 TK11100CSCB G 0311 8 729 010 05 TRANSISTOR MSB709 RT1 0109 6 708 889 01 MP2105DJ LF Z 0312 8 729 010 05 TRANSISTOR MSB709 RT1 IC202 8 759 100 96 455802 Q313 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 Q401 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 10203 8 759 100 96 IC 455802 IC302 8 759 100 96 IC 455802 Q403 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 10303 6 705 313 01 S T111B50MC OHJTFG Q405 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 10304 1 818 512 11 CONNECTOR FOR OPTICAL FIBRE 0407 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTOR UN2213 10401 8 749 925 00 IC TK11819MTL Q601 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTO
150. 25 100K 1K 150 4 7K 4 7K 10K 10K 10K 0 HX825 0 HX825 1K 10K 0 HX825 4 7K 150 1K 1 5K 1K 100 680 100 100 2 2K 2 2K 120K 2 2K 1K 100K 270K 39K 10K 10K 10K 10K 150K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W HX825 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W Ref Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks R1610 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W 03114 1 128 131 11 ELECT 22UF 20 50V R1613 1 216 837 11 METAL CHIP 22K 5 1 10W 063115 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 50 R1614 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W 03116 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V R1621 1 216 839 11 METAL CHIP 33K 5 1 10W 03117 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V R1622 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 C3118 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1 10 50 R1623 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 63120 1 164 217 11 CERA
151. 3 25 411 25 535 538 411 25 419 25 536 539 419 25 427 25 S37 S40 427 25 435 25 S38 S41 435 25 443 25 539 542 443 25 451 25 540 543 451 25 459 25 541 544 459 25 467 25 Programme Sort After the programme positions have been set you can change the order of each programme position in the display list 1 Select Programme Sort in Basic and press ENTER Basic Programme Sort 1 C1 AAB 2 1 CDE 3 C5 FGH Press 44 to select the row containing the programme position you want to move and press ENTER To display other pages for programme positions 4 to 99 press repeatedly 1 24 Channel Press 4 9 repeatedly until the programme position you want is displayed The programme positions are scanned in the order shown in the table below If you know the number of the programme position you want press the number buttons For example for programme position 5 first press 0 and then press 5 To disable programme position enter 00 The disabled programme positions will be skipped when you press PROG To select a cable or satellite programme position press until the programme position you want is displayed Name Changes or enters a new station name up to 5 characters The recorder must receive programme position information for instance SMARTLINK information for station names to appear automatically
152. 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 242 963 21 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10K 10K 10K 10K 0 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 lt COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK gt RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK 100 1005X4 100 1005X4 100 1005X4 100 1005X4 68 1005X4 22 1005X4
153. 4 France 2376 Netherlands 2499 Sweden 2046 Austria 2109 Germany 2390 New Zealand 2086 Switzerland 2057 Belgium 2248 India 2379 Norway 2528 Thailand 2070 Brazil 2238 Indonesia 2427 Pakistan 2184 United 2079 Canada 2254 Italy 2424 Philippines Kingdom 2090 Chile 2276 Japan 2436 Portugal 2092 China 2304 Korea 2489 Russia 2115 Denmark 2363 Malaysia 2501 Singapore 1 31 jeuonippy 127 1 32E SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY NOTE The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure Set Case block assembly Page 2 2 Tray assembly Page 2 3 Front panel assembly Page 2 3 FL 166 board FR 257 board Page 2 4 RD 064 board Page 2 2 Hard disk section Page 2 4 Hard disk DVD drive Page 2 5 Page 2 6 Power block Page 2 6 AV 106 board Page 2 7 2 1 RDR HX820 HX825 NOTE Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given 2 1 CASE BLOCK ASSEMBLY 3 Three special front point screws 4 Case block assembly 2 Two tapping screws 2 2 RD 064 BOARD Five tapping screws BV 3 x 8 4 Flexible flat cable FRD 011 201 Connector CN701 7 2 Connector lt Q lt 3 A 203 A VE E A e NS ISU 2 2 Lf a Screw RD 064 board Claw CD Coating clip Two Board to Board Connectors CN603 CN606 B 3 x 6 2 3 TRAY ASSEMBLY G 0 NAS NES lt 7
154. 49 RD 064 RISM3 HDD DRIVE V DEC FLASH ROM AV CN POWER DV PHY PLL AUDIO AD DA HDMI PRINTED WIRING 4 5 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5 IT CONTROL IC IC603 M306H5MG A14FP M306H5MC C36FP BOAR csset diede __ 5 1 5 2 MAIN CONTROL IC103 R8A34012BG RD 064 BOARD 5 4 6 SERVICE MODE 6 1 6 2 Screen Transition in the Service Mode 6 2 6 3 Items and Description of Service Mode Menu 6 3 6 4 Device Check Menu Diagnostic Test m 6 3 625 HDD service mode atantes bee endete Ne 6 4 7 ADJUSTMENTS 7 1 Video System Adjustment 32 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST 8 1 EXPLODED VIEWS E EN 8 1 9 12 CHASSIS SEC TIONG I soda dock 9 2 AAS 9 3 8 BLECTRICAL PARTS 9 4 SERVICE NOTE 1 DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT EJ ECTED FORCED EJ ECTION Remove the upper case 2 Insert the stiff wire in the hole and eject the tray The stiff wire Open the tray 1 2 NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJ ECTION 1 If the forced ejection is executed while a blank disc media DVD RW exists on the tray Insert a DVD ROM DVD test disc DVD software available on the market or the like in the tray and then close the tray Notel If you close the tray while it is empty ejection of the tray becomes impossible Note2 If you close the tray with a CD disc inser
155. 5 HDATA 14 REC65614 H 656 HDATA 11 656 1 We DDT2 24 4 HDATA 10 5 REC65610 REGGSGCLKI RIJ HDATA 9 R656CLKI A700 20 5 HDATA 8 RESET TMS R16 1 C1009 101012 HDATAIZ TMS y 0 DDOS1 0 01 HDATA 5 SS VDD 0 8 0005113 lt TESTM D MDDOSH w DDQS1 1 AN 314 HDATA 3 TESTM R190 lt TESTMODS MODOSIZ w 0005112 5 22 m lt lt TESTMOD3 0 wy 0005113 m 0 5 TESTMOD2 C153 B TESTMOD1 0 1u 3 TESTMODO B 23 V VDD E VSSADA10 VDDDDA10 TX 2 lt lt VSSDDA10B VSSADATO VCCADA10 BOUT PD2 cs RX 2 lt lt GOUT PD1 DADR 12 RTSIO ROUT PDO A NC 277 4 2 DADR 11 5 8 VSSDDA10A BAO VSSADA10 0 DADRISL A VCCADA10 DADRI8 A YOUT PD4 A10 AP I8LA cTs 2 lt lt COUT PD3 DADRI7 CLK 0 m REXT1 0 K VSSAAD10B DADRI6 VSSDAD10 A1 1614 VSSAAD10B VRMB SDA 1 lt lt ai _TX 8 VROB spci 1 CIN VINB1 R8A34012BG 88175 VCCAAD10B NOT USE CTSIS CSP CHIP SIZE PACKAGE IC 81024 CTS 1 A 47 VCCDAD10 INT 5 R1025 VSSAAD10A 1 106 INT 10K VSSAAD10A 0 1 K4H511638C UCB3T We VRMA 6167 512Mbit DDR SDRAM VROA ABS B DDATA 23 DDT2 23 HADRSI6 R1026 10K VRP
156. 5 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 939 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 977 11 1 218 959 11 1 218 952 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 961 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1
157. 512Mbit x2 EEPROM ___ 35 1 1 VDEC3 3V REG COMPARATOR 1 UNSwev 5 ome UNSW 8V A SWA 8V 2 5V REG i 18 8 vo vcc 2 Pie m T VA PCONT CN501 IC1 09 VA 4 SW3 4V REG 1101 102 3 3V REG i TU5V REG 603 A CONTROL 3 IC604 zu 58 EEPROM f ma 5 wo h 12908 12907 SET 104 5 FOR CHECK 5V REG 3 3V REG 1 8V REG FAN CONT 1 15902 i UNSWSV I 51 FR SIRCS 5V 3 FAN DET P FAIL 1 1 301 7 DETECT a DIGITAL vec OUT OPTICAL AW i 16802 16803 I 2 a CN902 AUDIO VIDEO HDMI SELECTOR SELECTOR GR UNSW5V V VIDEO 5V Qv con e CONNECTOR i 5V REG 25 0601 0605 0606 607 0716 GN502 BUFFER BUFFER 4 VOUT 6 INSEL PCONT VIDEO5V ah 608 0707 711 SWA5V 702 21603 M ee o i BUFFER VIDEO 1 701 SELECTOR 3 3 REG mes IC3002 IC3001 IC3101 1 REMOTE COMMANDER LED DRIVE FLD DRIVER RECEIVER ei I L FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE 3101 Power 13101 DC DC CONVERTER 3 9 3 10 3 11 RDR HX820 HX825 MEMO 3 12E RDR HX820 HX825 SECTION 4 SCHEMATIC
158. 6 1 8 POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 5 AV 106 2 8 AUDIO IN SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 7 AV 106 3 8 AUDIO OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 9 AV 106 4 8 TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 11 AV 106 5 8 IT CONTROLLER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 13 AV 106 6 8 VIDEO IN OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 15 AV 106 7 8 EURO IN OUT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 17 AV 106 8 8 IR CONT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 19 FL 166 FL DRIVER LINE2 IN POWER SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 21 FR 257 DV REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 23 RD 064 1 8 RISM3 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 25 RD 064 2 8 HDD DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 27 RD 064 3 8 V DEC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 29 RD 064 4 8 FLASH ROM SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 31 RD 064 5 8 AV CN POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 33 RD 064 6 8 DV PHY SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 35 RD 064 7 8 PLL AUDIO AD DA SCHEMATIC 4 27 RD 064 8 8 HDMI SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 39 SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 2001 EK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 41 4 3 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AV 106 POWER AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT IT CONTROLLER VIDEO IN OUT EURO IN OUT IR CONT PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 43 FL 166 FL DRIVER LINE2 IN POWER SW PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 47 FR 257 DV REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED PRINTED WIRING 4
159. 656CLKO ABCKO LOGIC REC656I 7 gt 18 REC656CLKI lx BERG D TX 1 1112 U gt gt TX 1 SN74LVC2G340CKR Br lt lt REC656CLKI ALRGKOW 2 gt gt gt ADATAOH 16 RX 1 REC656H 5 ALRCKOH 22 RX 1 lt lt REC656H SPDIFOH__ _N M RTSH ABCKOH RECGSGV SPDIFOH gt gt RTS 1 lt lt REC656V RTS 2 y RTS 2 2 SDA D 50 0 EISE 5 RTS 3 5 gt SCLK 2 5 VMCLK gt gt 0 S TX 3 AT2CS 1 BOUT RX 3 22 2 5 0 R gt BOUT CTSI3 E m GOUT N 0 ema R gt gt GOUT 50 3 5 SCLK 3 HCS 2 gt gt AT2ADR 1 E gt 5 ROUT EN gt HCS YOUT HDREQ 1 lt AT2IORDY gt YOUT GG 22 COUT ed N lt lt AT2INTRQ gt gt COUT RECCR gt gt AT2RESET lt lt RECCR RECVY UNIT gt AT2DIOR lt lt RECVY 3 AT2DIOW gt gt gt SPDIFO gt AT2DMACK PHYDIO O gt PHYDIO 0 lt lt AT2DMARQ PHYDIO 1 81010 R1011 R158 22 ADATAO gt PHYDIO 1 10k 5600 ET gt PHYDIO 2 ALRCKOH gt gt PHYDIO 2 W PHYDIO 3 em Lemon 9 2 PHYDIO 4 1 0 IDE_IORDY 27 8150 22 ON SPDIFOH moe Cm 5 PHYDIO 4 CSEL WARE i gt gt PHYDIO S AT2DATALS PHYDIO 6 0 6 8 IDE i 22 PHYDIO 6 4 2 za Panor gt PHYDIO 7 GND 30 RR 2 SIGNAL PATH PHYLPS IDE_INT RETIA 2 10 gt gt PHYLPS 58 AT2DATA 4 PHYSCLK
160. 6V 0732 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 0801 8 19 069 55 DIODE UDZSTE 175 6B 0866 1 126 947 11 47uF 20 35V D802 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C867 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 16V D803 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1103 1 125 837 91 CERAMIC CHIP 10 6 3V D804 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCDS 9F T1B HX825 C1104 1 162 962 11 CERAMIC CHIP 470PF 10 50 D805 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B HX825 D806 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1109 1 162 917 11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 5 50V 0807 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 HX825 D808 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 D809 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1110 1 162 917 11 CERAMIC CHIP 15PF 5 90V HX825 0810 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1111 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V 0811 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 HX825 D812 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 01401 1 124 589 11 ELECT 47uF 20 16V 0813 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 01402 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16 0814 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B C1403 1 162 924 11 CERAMIC CHIP 56PF 5 50V 0815 8 719 083 63 DIODE UDZSTE 1713B 01404 1 162 907 11 CERAMIC CHIP 2PF 0 25PF 50V D816 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B 01405 1 162 907 11 CERAMIC CHIP 2PF 0 25PF 50V 0817 8 719 083 63 DIODE UDZSTE 1713B 01406 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 16V D818 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B 1407 1 162 924 11 CERAMIC CHIP 56PF 5 50V 0819 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 01408 1 165 908 11 CERA
161. 7 TV GUIDE 3 9 e t ENTER D Changing the basic GUIDE Plus settings All necessary settings are made when you complete Easy Setup page 25 Follow the steps below only if you want to make changes to the current settings Note that if you change the country region setting Easy Setup will begin again when you close the GUIDE Plus system 1 Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system appears 2 Select Setup in the Menu Bar The GUIDE Plus setup menu appears 3 Select Basic Setup using and press ENTER 25 May 1010 Press or to select Then press ENTER to confirm Press the red button to go back to the main Setup screen Settings Language English Country United Kingdom Postal Code External Receiver 1 Promotional Panel External Receiver 2 External Receiver 3 1 12 4 Select a programme using 4 9 and press ENTER To enter a new keyword 1 2 Select Search in the Menu Bar and press ENTER Select Choice using gt Press the yellow button The display for entering characters appears Press gt 4 Y or A to highlight a character on the keyboard then press ENTER to select Press the yellow button to see special characters Press the T green button to save Please enter a keyword AAA
162. 727 C728 C729 C730 C731 Part No 1 162 923 11 1 107 826 11 1 162 923 11 1 107 826 11 1 162 923 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 125 891 11 1 107 826 11 1 125 891 11 1 162 964 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 124 589 11 1 162 963 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 925 91 1 107 826 11 1 162 908 11 1 162 909 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 947 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 726 91 1 107 826 11 1 125 837 91 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 124 290 00 1 126 947 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 947 11 1 126 947 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 947 11 1 126 947 11 1 126 964 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 125 837 91 1 107 826 11 1 125 837 91 1 107 826 11 1 104 662 91 1 107 826 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT
163. A 4 C175 B RECVY AD Wr DD1222 HADRS 7 SING INA 176 t Gm 21 MW 00121 DDT2 0 DDT2 15 J HADRS 8 CVBSIN VINA1 AD2 Sor too RX 0 HADRS 9 VCCAAD10A C169 B Wo 22 HADRS 10 VDD33 5 6170 0 119 RTS 0 4 HADRS 11 VDD Y5 ws Ci71 0 DDT2 1 1414 lt lt HADRS 12 ECTS C172 01 B DDATAM9 agi DDT2 19 mm ITREQ HADRS 13 DDATA 18 DDT2 18 ITREQ lt lt 4 DD T 05 B MH BBT2H sc 5 gt SCLK 0 4 16 D LK 0 NHADRS I6 KEL y T TDI 61610 Ach H EVENTO B TRDATA7 TRDATAG TRDATA5 TRDATA4 TRDATA3 TRDATA2 TRDATAO TRSYN DDT2 7 DDT2 8 PHYSCLK EHYSCLK eos 2 C1014 PHYLREQ Aw B1028 PHYCTLIO 0 01 RISMSTATUS2 gt gt PHYCTLO ies DDT2 7 B Ma DDT2 6 TMT T 0005110 DDOS1 1 PHYDIOO AW 0 w 4 4 C1011 PHYDIO1 b W R172 dl 8192 PHYDIO2 24 185 22 NE RB123 22 B 4700 0 5 8 PHYDIOS gt lt TET0 WBise 22 PHYDIO 4 0 0 5 PHYDIO4 lt 138 Bis 22 lt z pHyplog Y 001213 B189 22 PHYDIO 6 DDT2PTA R1094 0 wBis4a 22 PHyDIO7 Wr 0629 NAA 9111014 3 DDM1 1 RISMSTATUS1 lt lt VGLKI DCEE 195 22 A768F5441K Wc m 0102 R1048 0 to gt ME 76 88124 B R153 10K 11108 4 55 12 22 2
164. AL antennas use an AERIAL UHF VHF band mixer not supplied to connect the aerial to the recorder Synchro Recording does not work with some tuners For details see the tuner s operating instructions f you disconnect the s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected set top box receiver continued 1 3 B Connecting a set top box receiver using a SCART cord only With this hookup you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver Be sure that the set top box receiver is turned on To watch cable or satellite programmes you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the input jack connected to the set top box receiver Ce gt LINE 3 DECODER Place the set top box controller near the remote sensor on the set top box receiver Set top box controller page 13 pue Aerial cable Set top box supplied receiver ANT IN TOTV to SCART output EZ to aerial input TV SCART cord not supplied to G LINK to gt LINE 3 DECODER o FERRO DVD recorder E Signal flow continued 1 5 16 18 C Connecting the aerial cable only set top box receiver Use this hookup if you watch cable programme position without a cable box Also use this hookup if you are connecting just an aerial antenna With this hook
165. B device is checked 7 Key 7 is not used 8 Key 8 is not used 9 When the key 9 is pressed down IC603 of the AV board will be patched Never press the key 9 unless otherwise specified lt lt Device check gt gt 1 EEPROM Check 2 Super AND Check Not used Video Dec Device Check DDR Date Check DSP Check USB Check Not used 3 4 5 6 Not used 9 IT Setting Check result display C105 check result IC106 check result Display Message Meaning of Display DATA OK OK Both IC105 and IC106 are OK DATA OK NG IC105 OK IC106 NG NG No Good DATA NG OK IC105 NG IC106 OK DATA NG NG Both IC105 and IC106 are NG 6 3 6 5 HDD service mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 When the key 1 15 pressed down the ID check will be executed as shown below Indicate ID HDD information read out MODEL Model name of the product Serial No HDD serial No Model No HDD model No F W Rev HDD software version When the key 2 is pressed down Performance Check will be executed as shown below Performance Check Power ON OFF test and Read Verify of all tracks When the key 3 is pressed down Write ID will be executed as shown below Write ID NOR Flash HDD information write When the key 4715 pressed down Format will be executed as shown below Format Full erase of HDD When the key 5 is pressed down Factory Check will be
166. BOARD 2 8 M 13 RXI2 7 SWA5V lt lt 21 CN502 19 2 A SEE PAGE 14 U R646 2 3 RECVY 4 8 ili lt 15 UNSW6V OT 45 4 GND_V 1608 16 UNSW6V gt 603 e lt 5 VIDEO5V 17 UNSW6V MSB709 RT1 _N m UNSWGV 178 19 8 GND V 29 GND V 21 AV 106 DA A BOARD 5 8 Tu 23 3 4 6 7 9 0 2 ER LT Y Bs 5 E 27 SW3 AVC 28 SW34VC swa4vC 31 VDEC3 3V 33 VDEC3 3V ROUT gt gt Wz O 154 UNSW3V lt lt 1V REG SW3 4V 10 POZEW GND C608 C601 C602 C603 4 33 GND V CB B 34 VDEC3 3V zs 35 UNSWAV 36 UNSWAV rn gt RECCR V 37 UNSWAV s UNSWAV SPDIFO gt 39 GND 40 GND TELE RECG 11 JL614 2 WWE RECB 41 T SA 32 ua gt FSW CB PSP w TO GND RTI gt gt VDEC3 3V BUFFER RECVY Kim 4 c 07 Y MS 05 BUFFER GND gt gt UNSW6V E sW34VC 17 UNSW4V SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL AV CN POWER 4 34 RD 064 5 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiri
167. C CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 33uF 0 1uF 33000PF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 22uF 22uF 10uF 10uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 22uF 0 22uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 22uF 0 22uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 22uF 0 22uF 0 01uF 1uF 0 01uF 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Remarks 10V 10V 10V 16V 10V 10V 10V 90V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 10V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V
168. CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 10K 10K 10K 10K 5 6 100 120 120 120 120 120 680 680 680 680 680 510 680 18 10K 10 10K 4 7 22 470 100 1K 10K 10K 10K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 Remarks Ref 1 16W R703 R705 1 16W R706 1 16W R709 1 16W R 10 R711 R712 R 13 1 16W R714 R 15 1 16W R717 R 18 R719 1 16W R721 1 16W 722 1 16W R 23 1 16W R733 1 16W R808 1 16W R810 1 16W 911 R812 1 16W R816 R817 R821 1 16W R823 1 16W R825 R826 R827 1 16W R830 1 16W R839 1 16W R840 1 16W R841 1 16W R842 R844 R845 1 10W R846 1 16W R847 1 16W R901 R902 1 16W R905 R906 1 16W R907 1 16W R913 R914 R915 R918 R919 1 16W R921 1 16W R922 1 16W R923 1 16W R924 925 1 10W R926 927 1 16W R928 1 16W R929 1 16W R930 R931 R932 R933 8 17 Part No 1 218 935 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 208 910 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 864 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 93
169. COAXIAL Phono jack 0 5 Vp p 75 ohms COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y PR C R Phono jack Y 1 0 Vp p 0 7 0 7 Vp p G LINK mini jack HDMI OUT HDMI 19pin Standard Connector General Power requirements 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Power consumption 46 W Dimensions approx 430 x 73 x 328 mm width height depth incl projecting parts Hard disk drive capacity 160 GB Mass approx 4 7 kg Operating temperature 5 C to 35 C Operating humidity 25 to 80 Notes About This Recorder On operation If the recorder is brought directly from a cold to a warm location or is placed in a very damp room moisture may condense on the lenses inside the recorder Should this occur the recorder may not operate properly In this case if the recorder is on leave it on if it is off leave it off for about an hour until the moisture evaporates When you move the recorder take out any discs and do not apply shock or vibration to the hard disk drive If you don t the disc or hard disk drive may be damaged page 3 On adjusting volume Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section with very low level inputs or no audio signals If you do the speakers may be damaged when a peak level section is played On cleaning Clean the cabinet panel and controls with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or sol
170. DIFO m sporo i Eu T 21 SWA5V CN603 SEE PAGE 9 XLMUTE KE 4 XX 10 TO 3 8 RECVY gt gt gt 23 RECVY XRMUTECZ LE 5 8 EGW LO o JL553 VIDEO5V gt gt gt 25 VIDEO5V ZN 5 7 JL559 26 Y JL562 D SWA12V 2 gt Lis RECCCR gt 27 RECCCR to 28 GND_V R224 swa5v gt gt gt 4700 10V GND V JL561 gt SU JL558 31 RECB 32 GND V 33 V 34 CR R 35 RECG 36 GND V 37 GND V 0 5 0 5 gt 17 ro e 8 C216 10u JL552 a CR R lt JL556 10V 383 JL555 JL554 LL LLL 2 gt U gt L 5 518884 39 40 SPD_GND lt lt Z L3RC gt gt 41 e lt 1557 p AUDIO F Y CHROMA SIGNAL gt gt v gt 22 gt gt lt FSW gt gt 1 8 22 gt gt gt AUGND gt 12 TO 3 8 6 8 7 8 RECR GND_V ND_V CB B lt AUDIO IN AV 106 2 8 4 7 4 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 9 10 11 12 14 13 15 AV 106 BOARD 3 8 NO MARK REC PB MODE SM PATH AUDIO OUT VIDEOSIGNAL SIGNAL A R
171. DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 1 TV 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB OUT upstream LINE S DECODER 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB IN S Video OUT downstream Decoder DV IN 4 pin i LINK S100 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL Optical output jack 18 dBm wave length 660 nm DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL Phono jack 0 5 Vp p 75 ohms COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Phono 1 0 Vp p 0 7 Vp p Pr Cr 0 7 Vp p G LINK mini jack for RDR HX825 models only HDMI OUT HDMI 19pin Standard Connector Power consumption 46 W Dimensions approx 430 x 73 x 328 mm width height depth incl projecting parts Hard disk drive capacity 160 GB Mass approx 4 7 kg Operating temperature 5 C to 35 Operating humidity 25 to 80 Supplied accessories Mains lead 1 Aerial cable 1 Remote commander remote 1 Set top box controller 1 for RDR HX825 models only R6 size AA batteries 2 Specifications and design are subject to change without notice Compatible colour systems This recorder is designed to record using the PAL colour system and play back using the PAL or NTSC colour systems The signals of the SECAM colour system can be received or recorded but played back in the PAL colour system only Recording of video sources based on other colour systems cannot be guaranteed DVD RECORDER SONY WARNING WHEN SERVICING DO NOT APPROACHTHE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY I
172. DMI output is performed to equipment not compatible with DTS signals the signals will not be output regardless of the DTS setting HQ Setting Selects the HQ mode used for recording the HDD page 54 Records in higher quality approximate 15 Mbps HQ Records in the standard HQ mode DVD Rec Settings Bilingual Recording for all recordable discs except DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode Selects the sound to be recorded on the recordable disc This setting is not necessary when recording on DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode that record both the main and sub sounds Main Records the main sound for the bilingual programme Sub Records the sub sound for the bilingual programme Timer Settings Rec Mode Adjust On Automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded page 57 Off Turns off the function Auto Title Erase HDD only On Automatically erases old titles recorded on the HDD page 57 Of Turns off the function 48kHz 96kHz PCM DVD VIDEOs only Selects the sampling frequency of the audio signal 48kHz The audio signals of DVD 16bit VIDEOS are converted to 48 kHz 16 bit and output 96kHz signals containing 24bit 96 kHz 24 bit are output without conversion However the signals are output at 48 kHz 16 bit if copyright protected signals are contained Q Notes 48kHz 96kHz PCM setting has no
173. ECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 10uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 1uF 470PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 220PF 0 1uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 10uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 2 0PF 10uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 12PF 12PF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 22uF 10uF 0 22uF 47uF 47uF 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 2 2uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 22uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 20 20 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 0 5PF 0 5PF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 20 20 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 20 10 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 10 10 Remarks Ref 6 3V 0915 6 3V 0916 16V C917 10V C918 10V C919 10V C920 50V 0921 10V C922 10V C923 50V 0924 10V C925 10V C926 10V C927 50V 0928 10V 0929 6 3V 0930 6 3V 0931 6 3V 0932 6 3V 0933 16V 0934 16V 0935 16V 0936 16V 0937 50V 0938 50V 0939 16V 0940 16V 0941 16V C942 16V C944 16V C945 16V C946 6 3V C947 50V 948 6 3V 0949 6 3V 0950 10V C952 16V C953 50V 0954 50V 0955 16V 0956 16V 957 16V 01006 6 3V 01008 16V 01009 6 3V 01010
174. EF NO 10 000 SERIES AUDIO 5100 R320 zm 8320 SIGNAL ye ull imr A 560p TO AOUTR gt 8600 10 R317 C314 zu 0 5 150p 2200 180p 25 zz ere al W e B 4 4 oo B PP 0310 16302 4 2 1 xc 2802704 146 LINE OUT Odd R330 R355 47 dro N lt gt gt gt AUOUTR XLMUTE C327 C gt 220p XRMUTE 55 a TT gt gt gt AUOUTL 10 SWA12V K lt TET 2SD2704K T146 5 DA L SWA 8V lt lt lt MUTE gt TO 7 8 SPD GND gt gt gt 3 DA R D SPDIFO gt AOUTL gt gt gt gt AUGND gt 12 ro 2 8 6 8 718 AOUTL 55 SWA5V K lt UNSW6V A 0313 MSD601 RST1 UNSW12V A ik DIGITAL OUT 0301 0305 0307 0311 J301 BAS16 03W 16303 11 3 MUTE CONTROL 1 S T111B50MC OHJTFG EE 83097 258156171000 01 EX O COAXIAL TO 1 8 56009 120 SWITCH C321 2 GND A gt gt u 0303 9 5 MSD601 RST1 SWITCH 8365 R338 100k gt R332 G Wn 000 UNSW 8V A 22 2 gt Cu 3 0 JS32 TB VY 55 ox VIN 2 8 0302 je 8335 5 C307 R364 OPTICAL Q30 2SD1781K T146 QR Ma 47k 2 0 22u 33k C308 C309 MUN2111T1 8V SWITCH o Q305 250 C336 VCC SWITCH MUN2213T1
175. ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP 47 PF 0 1uF 47PF 0 1uF 47PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 47uF 0 1uF 0 47uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 680PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 470uF 0 1uF 3PF 4PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 1uF 0 1uF 1uF 0 1uF 22uF 0 1uF 5 10 5 10 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 10 0 25 0 25 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 10 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 Remarks Ref No 50V C732 16V C733 50V 0734 16V 0735 50V C736 16V C737 16V C738 16V C739 10V C740 16V C741 10V C742 50V 0743 16V 0744 16V 0745 16V 0746 16V 0747 16V 0748 16V 0749 16V 0750 50V 6751 16V C752 16V C753 10V C762 16V C772 50V C774 50V C775 16V C801 16V C802 16V C803 35V 0804 16V 0805 16V 0807 16V 0809 6 3V 0810 16V 0813 16V 0816 16V 0817 16V 0818 16V 0819 16V 0820 16V 0821 10V 0822 35V 0823 16V C824 35V 0825 35V 0826 16V C827 16V C828 35V 0829 35V 0830 50V
176. ERIES NO MARK REC PB MODE 5102 0 63A CN101 15 AW F gt UNSW5V V 22 GND V 1 TO 6 8 MW gt UNSW 8V V gt gt UNSW 8V V 22 GND V 2 gt Bt 5 UNSW6V A SWITCHING AW F gt UNSW12V A REGULATOR Era 0 SEE PAGE UNSW12V A 4 42 gt gt gt gt UNSW6V A 3 gt F gt UNSW 8V A gt gt GND A C UNSW 8V lt lt 4 10 8 8 5 8 PCONT lt lt 22 DET 14 Ra K lt FAN CONT SOS DC FAN CN103 3P 5 JL116 22 UNSWeV I FAN OUT 1 10107 10104 a JL121 dus 2 GND V FAN_DET 2 p 100p FAN DRIVE UNSW5V REG 3 gt gt GND D ES 1 102 gt gt 12104 UNSW5V I VDEC 3 3V REG TK73400AU3G0L C gt UNSWGV T 6 rou gt gt GND T gt gt GND I 8 gt GND T 7 rote C gt gt R102 gt sws5v s E SW5V R K lt 8175 0 UN WAV gt gt gt 8 D101 R114 EC21QS03L TE12L R113 EL UNSW3V lt lt ja 5 8 is C124 470u e 10V GND R lt lt 1 Gi 0106 12 C119 C118 1 Q101 g i 10u E tu 0 01 E MUN2213T1 6 3V 0 5 SWITCH VREC3 3V DIEGA 200 25V 25V 10V B UNSWeV R lt R162 0 SW3 4VC lt lt lt Note components identified by mark ZA dotted C1 09 line with mark A are critical for safety id C de 3 4V REG Replace only with pa
177. Guide Page menu appears AFT Select to turn on On Turns on the Auto Fine Tuning function Normally select this Off Allows you to adjust the pictures manually If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not work effectively select Off and press Press 44 to obtain clearer picture and press Receivable channels TV system Channel coverage BG West European E2 EI2 VHF Countries except those listed below Italia E21 E69 UHF S1 520 CATV 521 541 HYPER 501 505 DK East European R1 RI2 VHF Countries R21 R69 51 520 CATV 521 541 HYPER 501 505 Ireland A VHF South Africa 4 13 VHF B21 B69 UHF S1 520 CATV 521 541 HYPER 501 505 I Great Britain Ireland sluawisn py pue L France F2 F10 VHF F21 F69 UHF B QCATV 521 541 HYPER To receive broadcasts in France select L gt continued 97 2 Select the programme position for which you want to set or change the TV guide page using PROG or number buttons The TV guide page numbers Example P301 appear automatically when the recorder detects them Basic TV Guide Page If no page numbers are detected 000 you have to set the appropriate TV guide page number manually Basic TV Guide Page Prog 6 Sun P000
178. HADRSI O Bis HADRS I2 Owputofaddrss HADRSS 0 Bis em mx OwptorUARRCSIYGHO ____ _ psa mu OwwoUARRCSIYGMO S S B2 O Output of CS control signal for HDMI sub CPU ms lm O ms AHVDD Poversppyipu Amkg33V _ 6 ArabROr O OwpwofdeWseaMres RrDVD cr Arcs Oupuofchip setetsignaoforpyp O Output of transfer acknowledge signaGPIO0 oupuotchipseleetsignao OOOO Hcss OupuorcipssstsipuGPIOS _ cu oo _ ci HADRSD4 ci Ouprofamss cu HADRSIS O OuptofalmsiS ci os cis MSDATA cm 0 OwpuoUARRCSIGHO ____ SOS co OupuofUARTESOYGPHO ______ cm 0 cm OuprorXSMRDYforHDMIwb CEU _ cm Ouiputor UARTICSIOVGPIO SOS cn lp OOOO cu mu 0 Output or UARTCSIOVGPION s oupwotVOredsigna pe O Ouputof devise address torby _
179. HDD Sub Records the main sound for the bilingual programme Records the sub sound for the bilingual programme Main Sub Records the main and sub sounds for the bilingual programme Note If you change the recording mode while dubbing from a DVD to the HDD the sound recorded in the source DVD is applied regardless of this setting 1 26 If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with DOLBY DIGITAL signals the D PCM signals will be automatically output even when you select Dolby Digital MPEG DVD VIDEOs only Selects the type of MPEG audio signal PCM Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component without a built in MPEG decoder If you play MPEG audio sound tracks the recorder outputs stereo signals via the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack MPEG Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built in MPEG decoder Q Note If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with MPEG audio signals the PCM signals will be automatically output even when you select MPEG DTS DVD VIDEOs only Selects whether or not to output DTS signals On Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built in DTS decoder Off Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component without a built in DTS decoder Note When H
180. HIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP 10K 10K 10K 100 100K 10K 1K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref R1934 R1935 R1936 R1940 R1941 R1942 R1943 R1944 R1945 R1946 R1947 R1950 R1951 R1954 R1955 R1956 R1957 R1958 R1959 R1960 R1961 R1962 R1964 RB106 RB107 RB108 RB109 RB110 RB111 RB112 RB113 RB114 RB115 RB116 RB117 RB118 RB119 RB120 RB121 RB122 RB123 RB124 RB142 RB143 RB144 RB145 RB146 RB147 RB148 RB149 RB150 RB151 RB152 RB154 RB155 RB156 RB157 RB158 Part No 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 216 864 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234
181. IC IC 603 M306H5MG A 14F P M306H5MC C36FP AV 106 BOARD Pinno me 4 OwwetfDD msgu _ 6 _ s 1 Connected to GND when the _ 1 input of sub ctock signal lo _ m Owpwotma nceksgmi UMHz _ vs XN i input of main cock signal gt _ ver Power supply input 2809 1 Output of communication reser signal with RISM3 _ a DIMMER 0 Output of LED power Ca RISM STATUS2 O Output of communication status 25 with system oli _ Ps 3 Fa o Num mo 3 AVUuNKOUT O OwputofAV LINK siga _ s oupwoflCdocksignak _ 9 rusbar 0 hpwowpulCdwasgal _____ _ BONN NNNM output of tiner sigt _ Ouputoffiter signals dove _ 3 Power supply EN me NN 3 M Pea w SLICEON O Output ofsticer operation detection _ msour OuputofseiaTXD 1 signal with system controller _ 39 1 hwwofseiaRXDIsgmiwihsswemcomeler Output of serial CLK 1 signal with system controler _
182. IC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 560PF 560PF 180PF 180PF 47uF 47uF 220uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 1uF 1uF uF 100PF 220PF 220PF 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 47uF 100uF 0 1uF 10PF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 01uF 0 0047uF 0 1uF 47UF 5PF 3PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 01uF 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 10 10 20 10 20 10 10 20 10 20 20 10 0 5PF 10 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 20 0 25 0 25 10 10 10 20 10 Remarks 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 10V 10V 50V 50V 50V 10V 16V 16V 50V 50V 16V 50V 50V 16V 16V 10V 16V 50V 16V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 16V 16V 50V 50V 16V 16V 16V 16V 25V Ref 0620 C621 C622 C623 C624 C625 C626 C627 C628 C629 C630 C631 C632 C633 C634 0635 0639 0641 0642 0646 0649 0650 C651 C652 C653 C654 C655 C656 0657 C701 C702 C703 C704 C705 C706 C707 C708 C709 C710 C711 C712 C713 C714 C715 C716 C717 C718 C719 C720 C721 C722 C723 C724 C725 C726 C
183. IDE Plus system turn on the set top box receiver and connect the set top box controller not operate your set top box receiver just before or during a timer recording This may prevent the accurate recording of a programme One Button Recording GUIDE Plus You can use the GUIDE Plus system to set the timer to record a programme up to seven days in advance Colour buttons TV GUIDE C BM I STOP Press ENTER The date start and stop times programme position etc setting appear The recorder is ready to start recording To record on a DVD See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To make more detailed timer settings See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To stop recording during timer recording Press B REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Rec Mode Adjust of the Timer Settings to in the Recording setup page 107 Auto Title Erase HDD only If there is not enough space for a timer recording the recorder automatically erases old titles recorded on
184. IDEO C Y OUT 65 i 99 AUDOL 49 cvess Gb OU CR R AERIAL Cr OUT ADOR aon ees __ 7 1 4 0401 403 y 0702705 syNCIN ch TU VIDEO VIDEO Y Q708 SLICE OUT YNC SEP 1 TUDY 4 S Y IN D SYNCSEP evni gt 3703 1401 e 8 v cves RECW COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 EURO MSP gt 8 8 10304 CR CB B 0710 cer a EE 5427571 gt Cb IN 0313 OPTICAL OUT J301 MONO IN VSYNC gt COAXIAL 679 124 gt OUT i DIGITAL OUT ANA IN 1 TUR T OPTICAL SC1 OUT R 60 VDET1 OUT 2 UL XTAL IN SYNGRO DET a ZEE 13 SDA 1401 CVBS2 VDET2 OUT 9 5506 DY MUTE 351 RECG 6 c2 SCLOCK BE 4 a RECVY 0405 407 AGC TU G MAX SDATA O 57 CONT 30 0 Y G m CR R TOIFROM TU SCL RD 064 BOARD SCL CVBS YOUT 44 CN603 TU SDA 8 pg EE PAGE 3 5 50 ALL GD S 5 GES SPDIFO 60 2 2 1 Tu eves SE al VIN 1 ERE 3 AOUTR CVBSIY INT 45 7 ____ g Y2IN 68 AUX CVBS Y FSW 62 mo 121 AOUTL RIN AOUTL 7 PARALLEL SWITCH Tol 2 W 0 AUX R C 7 BI 44 AINL AUX B 10302 38 AINL 6 4 AUXG COMPARATOR ANR BLANKING
185. INK 21 TO 7 8 CEVISCK5 11 R2051S03 E2 F XOUT P23 BS_CONV_CONT VSS l C603 P24 BS_COR_DET 4 5 0 R1626 C655 C651 XIN 25 5 5 501 42 B 1000u 5 1 CONTROLEER T CONTEA NI RISM_STATUS5_2 JL501 VCC1 26 5 BIT SW RiSMsTATUSS 2 STATUS 5 2 VSB BITS ITSCK5 R501 0 502 Se 603 S 2 ITSCK5 e R2 6 P1 8 NE M306H5MC C36FP RISM_STATUS5_1 JL50 _ 5 CLKOUT INT2 INT vss 3 RISM STATUS 5 1 ITREOS D vee Si INT1 IT REQ P30 INSEL4 3 aS ITRE05 F 5 10k OINTO SLICE lt ma 5 RISM_RTS_0 XITRST5 5 1 5 1 6 ITSDI5 P81 IT XRST P31 XEEP_WP XITRST5 TA4OUT DIMMER P32 EEP_SCL mE 8 BB firsts 5 1 JL665 e 1 TASIN JUST CLK 24 SDA 4220 JL509 gt P76 RISM STATUS2 P34 INSEL6 3 e 7 0 75 P35 INSEL2 3 BIE 10 0 IC605 9 P74 V SYNC OUT P36 INSEL1 A NISE_TX 51 P73 P37 INSEL_3 G CLOCK GEN 0 5 1 XP VMUTE NISE_RX e TATOUT AVLINK OUT pg T1 T 15 501 SCLA TU SCL 1 E 2255 T1 P41 AREA1 10k J 12604 4 TU_SDA SDA2 TU_SDA_1 5 T P42 4 T0 4 8 6 8 7 8 c TEST 0 o za Z FMA _ 242 0 z E gt 202 pem s bem
186. IO gt 0308 0 1u C8 GPIO BLUE 100p B C323 33 CH1_A33GND FSW gt 0 1u e C9 GPIO FSO B 1 A33VDD C309 3 3 DGND 220p C318 CH2 A33VDD B CH2 A33GND MOD 2_A33 UN 0 1 0 3 0 I sr 10301 y D 149 ne SE OL um 5 C324 18 CH2 A18GND 1C301 RO P1 4 A 5 TVP5146M2PFP Y4 B 8 CH2_A18VDD Went e A18VDD REF NUBE 0325 18 e A18GND REF y5 REC6561 3 0320 CH3 A18VDD R1 6 P0 3 W ros osaka d E a osa Lee VI 3C cam ca 9 100p B 326 CH3_A33GND Tu B CH3_A33VDD gg SE mde 22598 22 A a 5 m Eh B8 5 a a DON e n 0 0 gt gt tx R gt 5 E A A gt 5 55 5 2 D gt mt amp e Tu 8 2223242526 3334 REC656CLKI VDEC3 3V gt gt gt gt A L303 10uH Dn LED IC302 C301 C303 C305 96 104 1 8V REG 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V GND 22 8328 C334 0 10 10 B B B 1302 lt ZXSYSRST gt 6 10 1 8 2 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 a BH18MA3WHFV TR 42 NOISE VOUT ds SIGNAL PATH L302 5 GND VOUT J TOuH H STBY vin ke 10u CHROMA Y Y CHROMA 1338 6 3V 6 3V gt gt gt DEC 4 29 4 30 RD 064 3 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 D 6 7 9 9 10 11
187. IP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP 100 4 7 10 47 100 4 7 10 510 33 22 22 22 10 0 6K oO OO OO 10K 10K 33 33 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 16W R1031 R1032 1 16W R1033 R1035 1 16W 1037 1038 R1039 1 16W R1040 1 16W R1041 1 16W R1042 1 16W R1043 1 16W R1044 1 16W R1045 1 16W R1046 1 16W 1047 1 16W 1048 1 16W R1049 1 16W R1050 R1051 R1052 R1055 1074 1078 1 16W R1082 R1083 R1084 1 16W 1085 1 16W R1086 1 16W R1088 1 16W R1089 1 16W R1090 1 16W R1094 1 16W R1098 1 16W R1099 R1102 R1154 R1166 1 16W R1169 1 16W R1175 1 16W R1186 R1188 1 16W R1189 1 16W R1906 1 16W R1907 R1909 R1910 R1913 R1914 R1915 R1916 R1917 R1921 R1922 1 16W R1923 1 16W R1927 1 16W R1929 1 16W R1930 1 16W
188. L CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 2 2K 5 6K 5 6K 470 470 47K 47K 10K 10K 10K 47K 10K 47K 10K 10K 4 7K 4 7K 100K 100K 470 470 47K 10K 10K 100K 100 10K 10K 10K 4 7K 4 7K 10K 15K 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 Remarks 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W Ref R619 R620 R621 R622 R623 R624 R626 R627 R628 R629 R630 R631 R632 R633 R635 R636 R637 R638 R639 R642 R643 R644 R645 R646 R647 R648 R649 R650 R651 R652 R654 R655 R656 R658 R659 R660 R661 R662 R663 R664 R665 R666 R667 R668 R669 R670 R671 R672 R674 R675 R676 R677 R678 R679 R681 Part No 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1
189. L2 IN MSD601 RST1 O 1u San ae S 709 B AU GND e 0702 705 4 21 SLICE 410 lt lt AUOUTL R2 IN 8 D JL711 13 roe lt lt AUOUTR s2sw lt lt Ra 8 SYNCIN lt lt HXD760 Australian EB e SVREF lt lt 702 LINE2 ___ __________ OUT 1 N JL724 E GE YA C4 b 9 gt 1 R713 714 0701 TO 5 8 INSEL PCONT gt gt 680k BAS16 03W 857 6327 VDET1FIL WIDE SEL2 R Y5 JL726 AUDIO SYNCRO DET lt lt GND SYNC SEP WIDE SEL1 p o zz VSYNC V_SYNC OUT 0 G_SYNC OUT D SEL XP_VMUTE 22 VDET1 IN o gt HDET lt lt VDET1 OUT IC702 GND C VIDEO F VCC I2C VIDEO IN OUT VCC TU 501 gt gt SCLOCK CVBS OUT 15 TO 4 8 5 8 7 8 1702 9 9 TU spa gt gt SETA LA73036M TBA E VOD JL715 8779 n z 7 JL731 GND I2C C OUT a 0707 711 VDET2 IN S Y OUT Ej VDET2 OUT VDET2FIL Y CVBS Cy Cb OUT2 VCC OFFSET CTL2 C Y OUT D721 STZ6 8N T146 0707 MSD601 RST1 S VIDEO I D728 STZ6 8N T146 AGC IN Cb OUT E gt gt AGC CTL VCC 5 E Y SLICE OUT Cr OUT b gt gt 5 gt N E o JL733 EZ e ow 5 9 2 JL734 1 m i gt lt
190. M system When a stereo or bilingual NICAM based programme is received NICAM appears in the front panel display To record a NICAM programme be sure to set Audio of Programme Setting in Basic setup to NICAM default If the sound is not clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts set Audio to Standard see Programme Setting on page 96 t Hint You can select the audio main or sub while recording bilingual programmes using the AUDIO button This does not affect the recorded sound Unrecordable pictures Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder When the recorder receives a copy guard signal the recorder continues to record but only a blank grey coloured screen will be recorded Copy control Recordable discs signals Copy Free pps CLUB CMJ Ev Copy Once HDD CPRM CPRM None a blank screen is recorded Copy Never The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM compatible equipment page 8 30109 53 99 56 58 Timer Recording GUIDE Plus ShowView Manual HDD CUI ET ET There are three methods to setting the timer within the GUIDE Plus system One Button Recording Show View and setting the timer manually Notes When the recorder is connected to a set top box receiver and you want to record using the GU
191. MIC CHIP 150 5 50V R1624 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W 03121 1 164 217 11 CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 5 50V R1625 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W 063124 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R1626 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W 1627 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 lt CONNECTOR gt R1628 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W CN3101 1 774 729 21 PIN CONNECTOR PC BOARD 10 R1629 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W R1630 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W lt DIODE gt R1632 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K 5 1 10W R1633 1 216 821 11 METAL CHIP 1K 5 1 10W 03102 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03103 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 R1636 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W 03104 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 1637 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W 03105 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 R1638 1 216 809 11 METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W 03106 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 1707 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 1709 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 03107 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 03108 9 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 1710 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 03109 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 R1714 1 216 817 11 METAL CHIP 470 5 1 10W 03110 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 1715 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 D3111 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 R1716 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP 75 5 1 10W R1717 1 218 285 11 METAL CHIP 75 5 1 10W 03112 8 719 056 82 DIODE UDZ TE 17 6 2B R1718 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 lt FERRITE BEAD gt R1719 1 216 833 11 METAL CHIP 10K
192. MIC CHIP 1uF 10 0820 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1409 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V 0821 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B 01410 1 124 261 00 ELECT 10uF 20 50V 0822 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1411 1 126 162 11 ELECT 3 3uF 20 50V 0823 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1412 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V 0824 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 C1413 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V 0825 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B C1414 1 124 261 00 ELECT 10uF 20 50V 0827 8 719 067 40 DIODE STZ6 8N T146 01415 1 127 715 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 22uF 10 16V D828 8 719 069 56 DIODE UDZSTE 176 2B 01416 1 124 589 11 ELECT 47uF 20 16V 01103 8 719 067 40 DIODE 5126 8 1146 HX825 C1417 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 16V 01400 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W 01418 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 01401 6 501 115 01 DIODE BAS16 03W C1419 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 C1452 1 107 826 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10 16V lt FUSE gt C1453 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V AF101 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE 0 63A lt CONNECTOR gt CN101 1 815 458 21 CONNECTOR BOARD TO BOARD 15P CN103 1 794 509 11 PIN CONNECTOR PC BOARD CN501 1 818 859 11 CONNECTOR BOARD TO BOARD 42P CN502 1 818 859 11 CONNECTOR BOARD TO BOARD 42P CN601 1 64 643 21 PIN CONNECTOR SMD 11P Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark A are critical for safety Repl
193. MSB709 RT1 R1609 TES 10k 10k GN 4 6 150k LV 4 6 5 1 42 GND 4 0 2 6 e K 0613 45 46 eer o 5 1 MSD601 RST1 NA OEG IN 0 R FF e Q611 615 AV LINK Note The components identified by mark ZA or dotted NEC did line with mark A itical for safet is a m ine with mar are critical 5 16V Replace only with part number specified 506 IT CONTROLLER 4 13 4 14 AV 106 5 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 106 BOARD 6 8 bd NO MARK REC PB SIGNAL PATH R REC MODE VIDEO SIGNAL MODE AUDIO 2 Y CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL i CB B i ccr CINE 23 L3B gt gt 5 136 136 gt gt TV VIDE 7 TO 4 8 VY AD C706 C707 AU2INL 0 10 0 1u B AU2INR gt C710 Ex C753 9 e 0 1u 1704 8 JL705 TO 7 m Fez FL 166 6 0 1 BOARD JL707 Gir 6741 CN3101 V2 IN e A7 wv Boso PAM 0 1u B gt 2 THROUGH THE FA 118 HARNESS AU GND nues C727 C731 C732 C719 6729 22 RUGND 128 SEE PAGE
194. Mode Conversion Dubbing Read the following and select according to the required time disc space and picture quality Dubbing at high speed High speed Dubbing HDD gt RWVR Eram Allows you to dub what you have stored in the HDD to a high speed DVD 8x speed DVD RWs 6x speed DVD RWs 16x speed DVD Rs 16x speed DVD Rs or slower versions of each disc type without changing the recording mode Set Dub Mode to Fast in the steps of Dubbing a single title Title Dubbing page 88 or Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles page 89 When dubbing multiple titles you can select Fast if there are one or more titles that can be dubbed at high speed in the selected titles However titles that cannot be dubbed at high speed are dubbed in the Original Dubbing mode The minimum required time is as follows approximate lt gt continued 85 Dubbing restriction You cannot dub movies and other DVD VIDEOS to the HDD Also when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD a grey blank screen will be recorded for scenes that contain a copy protection signal Copy Dubbing protection signals Copy Free 2 protection HDD signal 4 HDD gt G07 EV CPRM compatible DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode only CPRM Content Protection for Recordable Media is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images Move HDD
195. N 1146 e CN3004 4P ARE DV IN CN3005 6P TO RD 064 BOARD 6 8 CN701 53006 See SEE PAGE 4 36 3007 83018 012 53001 2200 DVD 0 5 BEAT ne R3019 R3023 0 27 53008 Sa 2200 53002 2200 CH HDD REC_STOP 0 REMOTE COMMANDER R3015 3009 R3020 R3024 RECEIVER 3300 3300 53014 5200 1 3002 0 INPUT_SELECT GP1UM28XKOSF RAGE 5600 53004 1 STOP o 0 R3017 53005 SN TM ES VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA Y CHROMA AUDIO SIGNAL gt 2 REMOCON RECEIVER FUNCTION SW LED FR 257 4 23 4 24 15 TO AV 106 BOARD 5 8 CN602 005 SEE PAGE 4 14 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
196. N CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROMA DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROMTHE SURFACE OF THE OBJ ECTIVE LENS ONTHE OPTICAL PICK UP BLOCK CAUTION The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT SAFETY RELATED COMPONENT WARNING COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK A OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK A ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY Unleaded solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead free mark LF indicating the solder contains no lead Caution Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size Lp LEAD FREE MARK Unleaded solder has the following characteristics Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 C higher than ordinary solder Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350 C Caution The printed pattern copper foil may
197. NG IN T 1 9 x 9121 FS AUX IN 80 AMP 5 8 5 8 R2 IN o 5 32 5 9 L2RI AD LOUT 8 603 1C604 LINE 3 DECODE O A L IN 603 CONTROL EEPR011 o d 32 76kHz EEP SCL 9 A R IN1 o 65 L1RI AD R OUT O 2 A L IN3 XEEP WP o 9 69 AUX LIN 1 i A R IN3 SYNCIN XOUT 9 R I 68 AUX R IN rs Lt our 9 1 40 LAL L1 ROUT 2 o 8 SYNC V1 XIN 5 DA LIN L1 LOUT 63 _ 1 i 8 DARIN AUX R OUT 1 f _ YNCRO DET 41 LAR AUX L OUT 62 68 5 61 VMUTE L XITRST5 M EURO INT 62 XINT3 IT XRST T FSW 0 BS C N DET 601 66 P FAIL DET I UNSW6V 0611 0615 2 AVLINK OUT PFAIL 61 HX825 only AVLINK d eL m 3 AVLINK IN LED STB _____ 1 1 1102 TU AUTOP i 84 AUTO PRESET LED XRESET 639 4 LED STB 1 IR TU G SIRCSIN SIRCS LED RST SIRCS XOUT X1101 1 TU 1 FLD DATA 2 Le TUS 16MH 2 XIN 3 1 62 525 FLD GLK GLK LED GK 1 RESET 5V IR INT DATA LED DT i Ai DIMMER C Y FLD STB IR BUSY 3 IR BUSY FLD STB 68 a KEYO 1 STB RXD KEY1 i i 43 RXD 0 6 1 STB TXD _ _ 1 42 KEY Mel CN602 1 STB TXD I RESET 5V 1 77 R RESET L GLINK KEY2 688 4 1 1 1
198. O mcn 2 VI 2B SDA K25 SDAO 39 FSW RESETB XEYSRST 14 31818MHz SPDIFO 4 SPDIFO XRMUTE 6803 7 8 AUDIO ADC DAC AINL AODATAI AODATAI AINL c AINR 4 AOBCKI 4 AOBCKI r AOLRCKI 16 1 AOLRCKI AOUTR 9 ADATAO ________ ADATAO 17 d Td 768FSCHG RX1 384FS48K OD SPDIFOH RD 064 BOARD 2 2 ALRCKOH 63 SEE PAGE 3 8 ABCKOH aQ 1 8 10112 i LOGIC IT SOUT5 8 TXO _RISM STATUS1 3 IFREOS RISMSTATUS1 C HDACKO RISM RTSO IT XRST5 ITSIN5 c CTSO ITLSCLHG RISM STATUS 301 Y Rise 5 8 2 1 1 2 IC604 RXI2 RX2 AND GATE DIAG CTS2 11 CN606 5 8 16605 62 AND GATE AE13 RESET 801 27MHz RX 0 av SCLK 0 RISMSTATUS2 RXO SCLKO 7 8 PLL 3 X1 IN 384FS48K 9 768FSCHG 13 4 OUT 768 548 HOS5 FSEL 768FS48K 7 2 768FS441K 11 52 AMCLK2 REF27M3 0 MO VMCLK 122 TX RD 064 BOARD 2 2 sai SEE PAGE 3 8 Crearson 3 5 GR RX2 0752 1 8 RISM3 AT1DATAO0 AT1DATA15 AT1 ADRO ADR1 ADR2 CS0 CS1 AT1RESET E2 AT1DMARQ 84 D4 B3 D3 B2 1 61 01 3 CN201 E4 D2 C2 A1 IDE D0 D15 2 03 4 06 07 06 07 ADE 0 4
199. ORHWS 0 HDATA 3 lt lt HADRS 10 1 1 1 4 HDATA 10 4 NY lt lt HADRS 11 2 2 a ns DG lt HADRS 22 HDATA 9 87417 0 lt lt HADRS 21 HDATA 1 6 15 0 ane lt lt HADRS 20 1 0 4 2 8 HDATA 8 Aly An lt lt HADRS 19 5 HDATA 0 2 wel X HADRS 18 A13 lt lt HADRS 17 pu 21 14 lt lt HADRS 16 0 5 gt 15 lt lt HADRS 15 22 lt lt HADRS 8 0 A23 lt lt HADRS 7 H FL501 SW3 4V 5 ULA ON GND 22 501 C502 10 B 04 lt lt XSYSRST gt 6 TO 1 8 2 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 6 3V 22 CTSI 2 TO 1 8 5 8 RX 2 2 R513 fu R518 10k FLASH ROM RD 064 4 8 4 31 4 32 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 RD 064 BOARD 5 8 AV CN POWER NO MARK REC PB MODE A REF NO 20 000 SERIES R REC MODE P PB MODE CTS 2 CTS 2 2 T0 1 8 4 8 TX 2 RX 2 BUFFER T0 1 8 2 8 6 3 8 4 8 6 8 lt XSYSRST lt RISMSTATUS1 gt R SS RTS O gt SN74HRTOQAPWR 1 RDR HX820 HX825 12 13 14 15 Adi an CN603 42 8640 T 3 TO 1 8 R41 w
200. OUT L1 FB OUT 60 f 16 NE R2 IN V Y OUT3 10 11 FUNCTION SWIN 6 pg 09 0309 310 MUTING CN502 1 2 1 CN701 J ITSCK5 ITSCK5 _ WY OUTI 2 CVBS YOUT 2 4 18605 0305 309 311 R C OUT 8 AE D301 6 11505 U POWER MUTE G OUT gt SWITCH 8 15005 TO FROM a our 69 3 a RISM 5 55 1 RD 064 BOARD s w 1 RISM STATUS6 2 CN606 D303 0306 308 312 5 RISM RTS 0 SEE PAGE 3 5 C OUT AUX 69 POWER MUTE XITRST5 7 ITRSTS SWITCH i FS AUX 8 veia NISE TX l 7 8 NISE RX BX DIAG DIAG IC803 o c 2 11 FROM 2959892 XRMUTE RD 064 BOARD VIDEO CN601 SELECTOR 9397213 2 XLMUTE SEE PAGE 3 5 FOR CHECK 1112 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 D M nn em 5 T CN502 2 2 i 1 s CELEEBEEE BLANKING OUT 5 5 8 R C OUT 7 8 CN805 a 220 4 IC802 k AV LINK AUDIO 3 5 8 LINE 1 TV O 8 FUNCTION SW OUT R SELECTOR 605 5 63 XCE 8 o T ASW2 4 3 i O A L IN 1 7 GLOCK GEN 8 CNVSS RISM STATUS2 23 6 3 O A L OUT 1 TSDI5 O 3 5012 ITSOUT 99 0 mus SDA2 69 ASW6 6 GLKOUT 3 9 ITSCLK 40 RISM RTSO TUL xvoce 7 1 XRESET MONITOR 1 1 VIN3 DTULI gt J XINT RISM STATUS 5 o 0013 TUR 202 D xnT2 o O BLANKI
201. Output of chip select signal ps Ouput of reset signal for HDMI sucr pw Du HADRSDS 0 bi HADRSOSI 0 Oupuofakmw25 5 7 Pinno me o 0 msns RX 3 1 0 Ep voo Powersupply input E ______ Power supply input Digial ay m vss Em voo Power supply lU Vs DiOND Em voos Powersupply mpar 7 Eb vop Power supply input Digital lU Eua 5 Es voo Power supply Digial rov ee Dig AT2CS ATIRESET lo EN y o 8 Ei vop Power supply input Digital L0V Ca 5 Ex voo Power supply input Digial UV Ex Power supply input Digial 330 O Output of device address O for HDD driver 1 7 5 FA AT2CS O Output of chip select signal for HDD driver 1 Fixed at GND wss ArbioR 0 OuputofVOreadsign SOS O Output of ACK wos Powersupply input 5 5 8 Pinno me Gm vs Gm B
202. P SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP Remarks Ref No RJK005N03 T146 R316 DTA114TKA T146 R317 25B1561T1000 HX825 R318 MSB709 RT1 R320 MSD601 RST1 R321 R323 R326 0 327 470 0 5 1 10 R330 100K 0 5 1 10 R331 4 7K 5 1 10W 10K 5 1 10W R332 R333 110K 0 5 1 10 R334 15K 0 5 1 10 R335 8 2K 0 5 1 10 R336 10 5 1 10W 0 R337 R338 39K 0 5 1 10 R339 12K 0 5 1 10W R340 0 R342 0 0 R343 R344 0 R345 0 R346 0 R347 0 0 R348 R350 0 R353 0 R355 0 R364 0 0 R365 R366 0 R405 0 R407 0 R409 0 0 R410 R411 22K 0 5 1 10W R412 22K 0 5 1 10 R414 10K 0 5 1 10 R415 10K 0 5 1 10 4 7K 0 5 1 10 R418 R420 4 7K 0 5 1 10 R422 4 7K 0 5 1 10 R423 4 7K 0 5 1 10W R428 220K 5 1 10W 10K 5 1 10W R429 R475 10K 5 1 10W R501 10K 5 1 10W R604 47K 5 1 10W R606 5 6K 5 1 10W 5 1K 0 5 1 10 R608 R609 5 1K 0 5 1 10W R610 5 1K 0 5 1 10W R611 5 1K 0 5 1 10W R613 5 6K 0 5 1 10 5 6K 0 5 1 10W R614 R615 R616 R617 R618 8 8 Part No 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 218 865
203. P 75 5 1 10W 03104 1 164 230 11 CERAMIC CHIP 220 5 50V R3109 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 03106 1 125 972 91 ELECT 100uF 20 16V R3111 1 216 827 11 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 1 10W 03110 1 106 363 00 MYLAR 0 006 5 200V R3113 1 216 849 11 METAL CHIP 220K 5 1 10W 03113 1 115 339 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 SOV R3114 1 216 849 11 METAL CHIP 220K 5 1 10W Note components identified by mark ZA or dotted line with mark AA are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Hemarks R3115 1 216 838 11 METAL CHIP 27K 5 1 10W lt SWITCH gt R3116 1 216 845 11 METAL CHIP 100K 5 1 10W 53001 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE PLAY lt SWITCH gt S3002 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE REC STOP 53003 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE REC 53101 1 771 410 2141 SWITCH TACTILE 53004 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE STOP 53005 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE DUB TRANSFORMER 53006 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE OPEN CLOSE 13101 1 445 017 11 TRANSFORMER DC DC CONVERTER POWER 53007 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE CH 3008 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE CH 93009 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE REC MODE FR 257 BOARD COMPLETE 53012 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE DVD Ref No 30 000 SERIES 53013 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE HDD 53014 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE
204. PAY TV Canal Plus Analogue Decoder You can watch or record PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder programmes if you connect a decoder not supplied to the recorder Disconnect the recorder s mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder Note that when you set Line3 Input to Decoder in step 5 of Setting PAY TV Canal Plus analogue programme positions page 31 you will not be able to select 1 3 because Line 3 will become a dedicated line for the decoder Connecting a decoder PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder Aerial cable supplied to AERIAL IN to SCART input e SCART cord not supplied SCART cord not supplied to AERIAL OUT to LINE 1 TV to LINE 3 DECODER COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DNI OUT R AUDIO L VIDEO SVIDEO TINK COAXIAL _ OPTICAL LINE 2 OUT 7 DVD recorder 30 1 7 Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder If the equipment has an S video jack you can use an S video cord instead of an audio video cord OUTPUT VCR etc S VIDEO VIDEO p AUDIO 4 suas pue Audio video cord S video cord AL not supplied not supplied DVD recorder N Signal flow t Hint When the connected equipment outputs onl
205. R This appliance is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER product The CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT MARKING is located on the laser protective housing inside the enclosure CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard As the laser beam used in this DVD recorder is harmful to eyes do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE B QUAND OUVERT EVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG 0 USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED BNING UDS TTELSE FOR STRALING VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING DENNA DEL AR PPNAD UNDVIK ATT DIG FOR STRALEN VORSICHT GEOFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B GERATEINNEREN ORHANDEN AUGEN NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN ABRE HAY RADIACI N LASER DE CLASE 28 VISIBLE 5 L SER v PRECAUCI N CUANDO SE E INVISIBLE EVITE LA EXPOSICI N A LOS RAYO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYVALLE JA NAKYMATTOMALLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILYLLE ALA KATSO SATEESEEN TOER ECAS UTR L LC E This label is located on the laser protective housing inside the enclosure Copyrights Television programmes films video tapes discs and other m
206. R DL VARISTOR VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP VARISTOR CHIP RD 064 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK Ref No Part No Description Remarks lt VIBRATOR gt 201 1 813 210 11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL NX5032GA 25MHz x301 1 781 940 41 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 14 318MHZ X701 1 813 695 11 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 24 576MHZ X801 1 781 867 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 27MHz X901 1 795 244 11 VIBRATOR CERAMIC 10MHz 1 474 022 11 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK SRV 2001EK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K gt 1 479 557 11 1 479 558 11 2 658 476 01 1 575 131 82 1 759 586 41 1 696 593 11 2 886 040 11 2 886 040 21 2 886 040 31 2 886 040 41 2 886 040 51 2 886 041 11 2 886 041 21 2 886 041 31 2 886 041 41 ACCESSORIES KOK K K K K KK K K K K REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D231P HX825 REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D230P HX820 COVER BATTERY FOR RMT D231P D230P CORD POWER CONTROLLER VIDEO AV MOUSE HX825 CORD CONNECTION PAL MANUAL INSTRUCTION FRENCH HX825 MANUAL INSTRUCTION GERMAN HX825 MANUAL INSTRUCTION ITALIAN HX825 MANUAL INSTRUCTION DUTCH HX825 MANUAL INSTRUCTION SPANISH HX825 MANUAL INSTRUCTION PORTUGUESE HX820 MANUAL INSTRUCTION DANISH HX820 MANUAL INSTRUCTION SWEDISH HX820 MANUAL INSTRUCTION FINNISH HX820 Note The components identified by mark or do
207. R UN2213 Q611 8 729 421 22 TRANSISTOR UN2211 12402 6 706 237 01 PQ1MX55M2SPQ 20601 6 710 144 01 80952CNMC G9NT2G 0612 8 729 010 05 TRANSISTOR MSB709 RT1 10603 6 806 806 01 M306H5MG A14FP HX825 Q613 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 IC603 6 806 866 01 M306H5MC C36FP HX820 0614 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 10604 6 708 842 01 S 24CS04AFJ TB G 0615 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 0616 8 729 904 87 TRANSISTOR 29B1197K R 10605 6 708 948 01 R2051S03 E2 F IC701 6 708 957 01 TK72233CMCL G Q702 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 10702 6 708 890 01 LA73036M TBA E Q705 8 729 010 05 TRANSISTOR MSB709 RT1 0801 6 705 338 01 TK11250CMCL G Q707 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 12802 6 708 892 01 IC BD3826FS 0708 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 0709 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 12803 6 708 887 01 7626 52 1651102 6 806 080 01 M30263M6A 703FP HX825 0710 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 103 8 759 649 43 IC SN74AHC1GOODCKR HX825 0711 8 729 010 29 TRANSISTOR MSD601 RST1 1401 6 702 714 01 IC MSP3417G QG B8V3 Q715 8 729 904 87 TRANSISTOR 29B1197K R Q716 8 729 421 19 TRANSISTOR UN2213 lt JACK gt 0801 8 729 010 05 TRANSISTOR MSB709 RT1 703 1 818 063 11 JACK PIN COMPONENT OUT J1101 1 64 188 31 JACK SMALL TYPE DIA 3 5 HX825 Note The components identified by mark ZA or dotted line with mark AA are critical for safety Replace
208. SD English Others Easy Setup gt continued 23 4 Select Others and press ENTER 2 SETUP Basic Dimmer Normal Video Command Mode DVD3 Audio Registration Code Recording Factory Setup DVD Format Others Easy Setup 5 Select Command Mode and press ENTER 5 SETUP Basic Dimmer Video Command Mode Audio Registration Code Recording Factory Setup DVD Format Others Easy Setup 6 Select a Command Mode DVD1 DVD2 or DVD3 and press ENTER 1 Set the Command Mode for the remote so it matches the Command Mode for the recorder you set above Follow the steps below to set the Command Mode on the remote 7 Hold down ENTER 2 While holding down ENTER enter the Command Mode code number using the number buttons Command Mode Code number DVDI number button 1 DVD2 number button 2 DVD3 number button 3 9 Hold down both the number and ENTER buttons at the same time for more than three seconds Easy Setup Line1 Output To output video signals select Video To output S video signals select 5 Video To output RGB signals select RGB Select Video to enjoy the SMARTLINK features page 18 If you set Easy Setup Component Out to you cannot select RGB If you set Easy Setup Line3 Input to Yes you cann
209. SISTOR gt C118 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V 03001 8 729 421 22 TRANSISTOR UN2211 119 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O tuF 10 10V Q3002 8 729 010 05 TRANSISTOR MSB709 RT1 C120 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V C121 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V lt RESISTOR gt C122 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V 123 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O tuF 10 10V R3001 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 R3003 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 C124 1 165 908 11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10 10V R3004 1 216 829 11 METAL CHIP 4 7K 5 1 10W C125 1 128 994 21 ELECT CHIP 4TuF 20 10V R3005 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W C126 1 126 209 11 ELECT CHIP 100uF 20 4V R3006 1 216 813 11 METAL CHIP 220 5 1 10W C127 1 128 994 21 ELECT CHIP 47UF 20 10V 128 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O tuF 10 10V R3007 1 216 813 11 METAL CHIP 220 5 1 10W R3008 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 129 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3009 1 216 806 11 METAL CHIP 56 5 1 10W C130 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3010 1 216 811 11 METAL CHIP 150 5 1 10W C131 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3012 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 C132 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0O 1uF 10 10V C133 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V 3013 1 218 855 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 0 5 1 10W 3014 1 216 825 11 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 1 10W C134 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3015 1 216 827 11 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 1 10W C135 1 125 777 11 CERAMIC CHIP O 1uF 10 10V R3016 1 216 830 11 METAL
210. SW1 5126 81 1146 1 3 u AUX_R_IN EK RA FS L1 IN bo R 22 ABA ROR R R825 100 100 DA_R_IN AU2INR L1 L IN IC802 C263 zo L J d R807 L1_R_IN 10802 100k GND EURO AUDIO IN OUT R877 2 R879 L LIE p L1_L_OUT 100k 220p 220 i i POUR 0 C864 5 100k 100k Li R OUT E E C818 zzi FB821 D813 D823 D827 4 9 ET STZ6 8N T146 STZ6 8N T146 STZ6 8N T146 B AU2INL m R810 100 Ez 0 FS_AUX_OUT R899 827 0 470 C809 FS L1 OUT 1 100 0 2 L2_R_IN B ASW5 AD_L_OUT zza 20 EU AU OUT L 0 TO 2 8 K ZSME AD_R_OUT STD Ez 5 EU AU OUT R m R828 iu 100 B w VIDEO SIGNAL AUDI CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL gt gt EURO IN OUT 4 17 4 18 AV 106 7 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AV 106 BOARD 8 8 RDR HX825 IR CONT lt lt RESET5V NO MARK REC PB MODE IC1102 30263 6 154705 1k P10 1 AN1 AVss 0 R1101 P10 2 AN2 4700 ER e o JL906 e AW R1116 AN31 ud 008 P9 0 TBOIN 71808 AN30 CLKOUT 1 1 22 TO 5 8 41911
211. T ADS VSSAADIOA Lap Nc ADS VCCAADIOB Power supply Amlog3aW DAG _ ROUTDO O Output of analog video signal fed 5 5 la OOOO Aps 0 ADO VSSADAID aa 5 ADIO COUTED3 0 Output of analog video signal TESTMOD 5 Papi Recesso O Canis Recesso O Nowed DADRSI ADO DBAU Ouputof bank address rSDRAM vDD2s Powersuppiyinpu Analog Des OwpwotcipssetsgmlforSDRAM AD peas O Output O Owputofelosksignalfor SDRAM DilGND VSSAADIOA VGCAADIOA Powerspplyinut Ambg33VXDAO AES VSSAADIOB O Output of analog video signal gree _____ ABS VSSADAID AmkgOND AO SSS YouTeb9 0 Oupuofanlogwdeosignai _ a vss o Lm Bs ATIDMACK _ Be _ m Lm me po OutputofchipsekecsignaltorHDMIDEmod 5 6 Pinno me oo _ mi marson o 0 Hapmspo Bu
212. VER 5V FUNCTION KEY HDD DVD 1 TIMER LED DRIVE SYNCHRO 13001 1 603 AVLINK BUFFER XITRST5 REC6561 CLOCK SYNC VIDEO DECODER UNSW6V x301 14 31818MHz P FAIL DET UNSW6V SW3 4VC Y Y gt SW5V UNSW4V X602 10MHz UNSW3V RE 10803 LINE 2 IN 16803 2 SPDIFO VIDEO SELECTOR SPDIFOH 5 16302 DAL DAR AOUT L AOUT AODATAI lt 1 lt 1 AIN L AIN 803 ADATAO AUDIO TUL TUR ADC DAC IC802 MUTING 768FSCHG 384FS48K AUDIO i 768rscHG SELECTOR gt 202 203 Vi o 2 112 LOGIC CN805 B 605 SCLK 0 RX 0 LINE1 TV O 6 V Y OUT J RISMSTATUS2 AVLINK ene XSYSRST O 11 81 1 L1 R1 OUT 12604 41 3 5 4 E gt lt 2 5 9 59 9 8 2 LINES DECODE 1802 FSEL X801 O a 3 O L3 R3 OUT VMCLK o 9 A768 FS48K 768 FS441K X603 32 76kHz ND3101 4 m FLUORESCENT 31
213. ace only with part number specified 8 6 Ref Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks lt FERRITE BEAD gt lt COIL gt FB701 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD L102 1 419 630 21 INDUCTOR 4 7uH 702 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD L401 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB801 1 500 283 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD L402 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH FB802 1 469 876 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD L403 1 414 858 31 INDUCTOR 1mH FB803 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP L404 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH 804 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP L405 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB805 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP 406 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB806 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP L701 1 412 060 11 INDUCTOR 22uH FB807 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP 1702 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH FB808 1 500 283 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD L703 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH 809 1 469 876 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 1704 1 469 967 21 INDUCTOR 10uH FB810 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP L803 1 414 743 21 INDUCTOR 47uH FB811 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP 1401 1 414 856 11 INDUCTOR 10uH FB812 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP FB813 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP IC LINK gt FB814 1 469 796 21 FERRITE CHIP 5102 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE 0 63A FB815 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD NPS103 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE 0 63A FB816 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD NPS602 1 576 570 21 FUSE MICRO 1608 TYPE 0 63A FB817 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD FB818 1 414
214. al WO mpwoutputofdaa 15 for SDRAM SSS WO Inpuwouputof data 7for SDRAM Output of data sobe signal 7 hpwordmaoforHY SSCS ER KR NE KOH MN ECH EN 70 Input of clock signal iii mpu owpuofdaasfor BRAM 5 11 24 ms 9 U4 US _ 22 _ U23 _ U24 _ 05 _ 2 m LA GZ a RZE vm V23 V24 DDATA V25 ppaso Wi PHYDIOD 1 wj PHYLPS 0 W3 PHYSCLK W4 TRDATAD WS vss Wii DDATALI4 W2 DDATAUS wa ys WM4 VDDS W25 DDATAJ6 Y PHYCTHO Y2 TRDATAO Y3 Y4_ TRDATAI6 YS VD 225 2 T4 T5 21 T22 T24 T25 Ul U2 U3 U4 05 021 022 023 024 025 VI V2 V3 V4 V5 V21 22 V23 V24 U V25 WI W2 W3 WA WS W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y21 Y22 Y23 Y24 Pinname Wo mm _ wm ws 5 12 RDR HX820 HX825 SECTION 6 SERVICE MODE This is the diagnostics to locate cause of fault The diagnostics can be executed using the remote commander and a monitor To enter the service mode connect the VIDEO OUT connector of the main unit to the monitor While pressing 2 Open Close button
215. al applied to some DVD programmes could affect picture quality If you still experience this problem even when you connect your recorder directly to your TV try connecting your recorder to your TV s S VIDEO input gt You have set the recorder to progressive format even though your TV cannot accept the progressive signal In this case hold down M and press PROGRAM minus on the unit gt Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format 525p 625p signals the image may be affected when you set the recorder to progressive format In this case hold down and press PROGRAM minus on the unit and the recorder is set to normal interlace format gt Youare playing a DVD recorded in a colour system that is different from your TV gt Noise may appear in the pictures recorded on the HDD which is due to the characteristics of HDD and is not a malfunction gt When playing a double layer DVD the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch There is no picture or the picture noise appears when connected to the DV IN jack gt Try the following Turn the recorder off and on again Turm the connected equipment off and on again Disconnect and then connect the i LINK cable again The picture does not fill the screen even though the picture size is set in TV Type of the Video Output in the Video setup gt The picture size of the t
216. album For instance when you want to go from to Any sub albums tracks or files contained within a currently selected album take priority over the next album in the same tree Example contains 6 so 2 is played before Hints f you add numbers 01 02 03 etc to the front of the track file names when you store the tracks or files in a disc the tracks and files will be played in that order Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start playback it is recommended that you create albums with no more than two trees yoeq e d gt continued 75 76 78 Notes Depending on the software you use to create the DATA DVD DATA CD the playback order may differ from the above illustration No more than a total of 999 individual folders can be played Folders that do not contain JPEG MP3 DivX files are counted as well No more than a total of 999 folders and 9999 files can be played Files other than JPEG MP3 DivX files and folders that do not contain JPEG MP3 DivX files are counted as well No more than 999 folders and files can be recognized in a single folder Folders that do not contain JPEG MP3 DivX files are counted as well Proceeding to the next or another album may take some time This recorder supports MP3 audio bit rates up to 320 kbps To open up disc space To open up disc space on a DVD RW or DVD RW Video mode erase the title with the large
217. ally adjusted within each setting range according to the video bit rate and other factors Sharpness Sharpens the outlines of the images PB Video Equalizer Playback video equalizer Adjusts the picture in greater detail Select an item and press ENTER Contrast changes the contrast Brightness changes the overall brightness Colour makes the colours deeper or lighter Hue changes the colour balance 3 Press lt gt to adjust the setting and press ENTER The default settings are underlined FNR weak Off 1 2 3 strong BNR weak Off 1 2 3 strong MNR weak Off 1 2 3 strong Sharpness weak Off 1 2 3 strong PB Video Equalizer Contrast weak 3 0 3 strong Brightness dark 3 0 3 bright Colour light 3 0 3 deep e Hue red 3 0 3 green Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust any other items 1 softens the outlines of the images 2 enhances the outlines and 3 enhances them more than 2 yoeg e d gt continued 69 While recording to a DVD Play a previously recorded programme on the HDD by pressing HDD While recording to a DVD RW VR mode L Play another title on the same DVD RW VR mode disc 2 1 Simultaneous Rec and Play function does not work when you record on a Ix speed DVD RW in the HQ or HSP recording mode Picture noise may app
218. amme Setting Video Programme Sort Audio TV Guide Page Recording Clock DVD OSD English Others Easy Setup 1 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 8 Select Programme Setting and 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER press ENTER Basic Programme Setting amp SETUP Basic gt Programme Setting Video Programme Sort PAYTVI Audio TV Guide Page Prog System Channel Name CANAL Audio AFT Recording Clock DVD OSD English 1 BG C1 AAB Off NICAM On Others 2 DK 51 Standard 5 Off NICAM Easy Setup 9 press 4 4 to select the desired programme position and press ENTER 3 Select Video and press ENTER 8 SETUP Basic Programme Setting Basic Video Output Video Scart Setting Audio Pause Mode Recording Colour System A DVD Auto Display PAY TV Others Screen Saver Prog System Channel CANAL Audio AFT 1 C1 AAB Off On 2 51 Standard 3 BG C5 FGH Off On Easy Setup gt continued 31 32 34 10 Select System using lt Basic Programme Setting PNE Audio AFT 1 BG C1 AAB Off NICAM On DK 51 Standard 3 5 On w 1
219. ancelled 5 Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme HDD Em You can label a DVD title or programme by entering characters You can enter up to 64 characters for a title or disc name but the actual number of characters displayed in the menus such as the Title List will vary The steps below explain how to change the name of the recorded programme Number 900 buttons INPUT SELECT TITLE LIST _ EJ t4 ENTER 1 Press TITLE LIST 2 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Title Name and press ENTER The display for entering characters appears Press lt 4 gt to move the cursor to the right of the display and select A upper case a lower case or Symbol and press ENTER ENTER OPTIONS DISPLAY o Press DISPLAY The displays differ depending on the disc type or playing status oe D 1 English Dolby Digital 2 0 Q Title 1 3 Angle3 5 the Audio setup the DTS track selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks page 104 When Auto Display is set to On default in the Video setup page 103 information automatically appears on the screen when the recorder is operated The characters for the selected type are displayed 1 Title
220. aracter Select the character and press ENTER To erase all of the characters select Clear and press ENTER Select Finish and press ENTER To cancel the setting select Cancel mouy suoljesadg 21528 14013 gt continued 39 use the number buttons You can also use the number buttons to enter characters Refer to the number next to each row of letters on your TV screen 1 m step 5 above press a number button repeatedly to select a character Example Press the number 3 button once to enter p Press the number 3 button three times to enter F 2 Press ENTER and select the next character 3 Select Finish and press ENTER Hint You can switch between upper case lower case or Symbol by pressing INPUT SELECT 40 Finalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc open close et ENTER OPTIONS Finalising the disc using open close button 1 Make a recording See 2 Recording a Programme on page 33 2 Press open close The display shows the approximate time required for finalising and asks for confirmation For DVD RWSs the recorder automatically starts finalising the disc After finalising the disc will be ejected automatically 3 Select OK and
221. atching the programme at a later time This is useful when you receive an unexpected phone call or visitor while watching TV 1 While viewing a TV broadcast with this recorder press II The picture pauses You can pause the picture for up to three hours TV pause 2 Press HI or again to resume watching the programme Notes Paused titles are not saved to the HDD This function is cancelled when stop is pressed PROG is pressed DVD is pressed open close is pressed TITLE LIST is pressed INPUT SELECT is pressed the recorder is turned off a timer recording or Synchro Recording is started the PDC VPS function is and channel scan is started DV dubbing or regular dubbing is started t may take one minute or more to resume playback of the paused programme Evenifyou fast forward the recorded programme there will always be a time difference of about one minute or more between the recorded programme and the current TV broadcast 1 17 Notes Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles recorded on this recorder Slideshows made with a DVD camcorder can only be played Other play functions such as fast forward cannot be used Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD When playing DTS encoded CDs excessive noise will be heard from the LINE1 TV LINE 3 DECODER LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks To avoid
222. aterials may be copyrighted Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws Also use of this recorder with cable television transmission may require authorization from the cable television transmitter and or programme owner This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Copy guard function Since the recorder has a copy guard function programmes received through an external tuner not supplied may contain copy protection signals copy guard function and as such may not be recordable depending on the type of signal IMPORTANT NOTICE Caution This recorder is capable of holding a still video image or on screen display image on your television screen indefinitely If you leave the still video image or on screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time you risk permanent damage to your television screen Plasma display panels and projection televisions are especially susceptible to this If you have any questions or problems concerning your recorder please consult your nearest Sony dealer Precautions This un
223. cannot adjust the recording quality HDD DVD once the recording starts The beginning of some recordings may not be made when using the PDC VPS function You cannot extend the recording duration time when PDC VPS is set to page 62 6 Select the input source using 4 9 and select the programme position using the number buttons or 4 9 You can also select the programme position using the yellow button Channels 1 Press the green button Next The display for entering characters appears To change the title name select a character on the keyboard using lt and press ENTER To switch between upper case lower case or characters with accents press the yellow button Keyboard 8 Press the green button Save The date start and stop times programme position etc setting appear The recorder is ready to start recording To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To stop recording during timer recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Rec Mode Adjust in the Recording setup to page 107 Auto Title Erase HDD only If there is not
224. corrected even when the S video cable is connected Test point S VIDEO OUTPUT S Y connector terminated in 750 Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 0 07 Vp p 1 0 0 07Vp p Fig 7 2 3 S Video Output S C Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the S video output S C conforms to the PAL standard If it adjusted incorrectly the playback color will not be too dark or too thin Test point S VIDEO OUTPUT S C connector terminated in 750 300 nV 50 mV Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 300 mV 30 mVp p Fig 7 3 4 Component Video OutputY Check Purpose This check confirms that the component Y signal output has the rated amplitude If this signal level is not correct brightness of the video signal will not be too dark or too thin when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input Mode connector terminated in 75Q Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to ON 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the signal level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p Test point Instrument Specification 1 0 0 07Vp p Fig 7 4 300 30 7 2 5 ComponentVideo Output B Y Pb Check lt Purpose gt T
225. covery function was activated when the recorder was turned on because the power was turned off or failed during recording Leave the recorder on until RECOVERY disappears from the front panel display HDD ERROR appears in the front panel display gt The hard disk error occurred Press down I O on the recorder for ten seconds until WELCOME appears in the front panel display If this does not resolve the problem format the recorder s HDD by pressing down the HDD button on the recorder for more than ten seconds until FORMAT appears in the front panel display Note that all the contents recorded on the HDD will be erased If this does not fix the problem contact your nearest Sony dealer FAN ERROR appears in the front panel display gt Check that the vent on the rear of the recorder is not blocked Then immediately disconnect the mains lead Leave the recorder off for a while then re connect the mains lead and press 1 01 on the recorder Mechanical sound is heard when the recorder is off gt While the recorder is adjusting the clock for the Auto Clock Set function scanning the programme positions for the PDC VPS function or updating the EPG information operational noises such as the internal fan may be heard even when the power is off This is not a malfunction 119 120 122 Self diagnosis Function When letters numbers a
226. ct an option and press ENTER You can make the following edits to the title Erase Erases the selected title Select when asked for confirmation Protect Protects the title 4 appears next to the protected title Title Name Allows you to enter or re enter a title name page 39 Erase Erases a section of the title page 79 Divide Divides a title into two titles page 80 Erasing and Editing Before Editing This recorder offers various edit options for various disc types Notes You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc or a timer recording starts while editing DVD discs created by DVD video cameras cannot be edited on this recorder If a message appears and indicates that disc s control information is full erase or edit unnecessary titles When editing a DVD R or DVD R finish all al editing before finalising the disc You cannot edit a finalised disc a HDD 5 Edit features Original Playlist Original Playlist title title title title EFH Erase page 78 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Protect page 78 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Title Name page 78 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A B Erase page 79 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Erase Titles page 79 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Divide page 80 Yes Yes No Yes No Set Thumbnail page 78 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Chapter mark page 81 Yes Yes Yes Yes No Creatin
227. ctions of this recorder See the instruction manual supplied with the digital video camera as well before connecting X Hint If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the initial dub use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD RW DVD R VR mode or HDD 5 Indicates titles containing copy protection signals page 87 When you select a title with 2222 the display asks for confirmation To select OK 6 Order of dubbing 6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles you want to dub 7 Select and press ENTER The display for selecting the dubbing mode appears 8 select a dubbing mode using 4 Fas Original HSP SP L SLP lt EP lt LP lt ESP lt From the HDD to a DVD only Appears when available for the title page 85 g Select Start and press ENTER The remaining time of dubbing appears in the front panel display To automatically adjust the dubbing mode If there is not enough available space on the target disc the recorder automatically selects a dubbing mode with lower picture quality according to the available space The same dubbing mode is set for all of the titles If disc space is insufficient for the selected dubbing mode the following display appears after step 9 of Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles on page 89 Dub Selected Titles There is not enough memory Th
228. d To select 1 2 8 This title will be dubbed Set the dub mode Rec Mode SP 1 World Cup Final Dub Mode 5 SP 2 1GB Cancel 1 Size of the title approximate This is displayed in red when the size exceeds the available space on the dubbing target media 2 Direction of dubbing Available space on the disc to be dubbed approximate 4 Information about the title to be dubbed 5 Dubbing mode and the space that remains after dubbing approximate To stop dubbing Press OPTIONS to select Stop Dubbing and press ENTER When asked for confirmation select and press ENTER When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free disc space for DVD Rs DVD Rs t Hint You can turn off the recorder during dubbing The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off 6 Select Dub Mode 7 Selecta dubbing mode using 4 9 Fas HQ gt HSP gt SP LSP EP lt LP esp lt From the HDD to a DVD only Appears when High speed Dubbing is available for the title page 85 8 Select Start and press ENTER The remaining time of dubbing appears in the front panel display To automatically adjust the dubbing mode If there is not enough available space on the target disc the r
229. d If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the Scart connector output signal is connected to a projector having Scart input Test point Scart Video output B connector pin 7 terminated in 750 Specification 700 mV 50 mVp p Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to OFF RGB OUT should be set to ON 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 10096 color bars 2 Confirm that the B signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p MLM Fig 7 12 7 4 RDR HX820 HX825 SECTION 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST 8 1 EXPLODED VIEWS NOTE X mean standardized parts so they may e The mechanical parts with no reference number h aede ene w nth lied The components identified by mark or i PSB pue dotted line with mark are critical for safety Items marked are not stocked since they e Color Indication of Appearance Parts Replace only with part number specified are seldom required for routine service Some Example delay should be anticipated when ordering these KNOB BALANCE WHITE RED items T T Parts Color Cabinet s Color 8 1 1 OVERALL SECTION Ref No DP X 2149 427 1 ASSY TRAY X 2149 426 1 FRONT PANEL ASSY HX825 X 2149 435 1 FRONT PANEL ASSY HX820 3 077 331 01 BV3 3 CR 1 833 387 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FLR 008 co Cha
230. ding point by pressing 4 4 and press ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if the dividing point is correct If the dividing point is incorrect select the dividing point using 11 11 and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation To change the dividing point press t 6 Select and press ENTER The title is divided in two Hint After a title is divided the title name prior to division is assigned to both the first and second parts 8 Press ENTER if the OUT point is correct If the OUT point is incorrect select the OUT point using and press ENTER The selected scene is added to the scene list To add more scenes go to step 5 9 When you finish adding scenes press KIJE Create a Playlist 1 World Sports Total 0 13 19 Scenes U IN 0 10 26 OUT 0 23 45 z OK Select Preview 1 Total duration of the selected scene 2 Total number of scenes 3 Selected scene 10 Select the scene you want to re edit and press ENTER sub menu appears Move Changes the scene order using lt and press ENTER Erases the scene When asked for confirmation select OK To add more scenes press 4 0 step 5 add more scenes from another title select Select and go to step 4 To preview all of t
231. e Setting menu screen 6 4 Device Check Menu Diagnostic Test 1 When the key 1 is pressed down the EEPROM device check will be executed EEPROM device is checked whether it 15 mounted or not and the I2C communication between Rism3 IC103 and EEPROM is checked 2 Key 2 is not used When the key 2 is pressed down the super AND device check will be executed The super AND device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the I2C communication between Rism3 IC103 and super AND 15 checked 3 When the key 3 is pressed down the Video Dec device check will be executed The Video Dec device 1s checked whether it 1s mounted or not and the I2C communication between Rism3 IC103 and Video Dec 15 checked 4 When the key 4 is pressed down the DDR Data device check will be executed The DDR device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the electrical signal connection between Rism3 IC103 and DDR device is checked 5 Key 5 15 not used When the key 5 is pressed down the DSP device check will be executed The DSP device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the electrical signal connection between Rism3 IC103 and DSP device is checked 6 Key 6 is not used When the key 6 is pressed down the USB device check will be executed The USB device is checked whether it is mounted or not and the electrical signal connection between RISM3 IC103 and US
232. e Video Cords HDMI Cord Select one of the following patterns through according to the input jack on your TV monitor projector or AV amplifier receiver This will enable you to view pictures pue sdnyooy INPUT COMPONENT VIDEO IN VIDEO Audio video cord video cord not supplied not supplied EO green o e blue PR C AUDIO j R CR red Or Do TV projector or AV amplifier receiver EEE TV projector or AV amplifier receiver to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT red to LINE 2 OUT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT HOME OUT BOO GELINK COAXIAL OPTICAL to HDMI OUT o LINE 2 OUT 5 VIDEO HDMI cord not supplied SCART cord not supplied S video cord not supplied TV projector or AV amplifier receiver TV projector or AV amplifier receiver TV DN Signal flow continued 17 For playback One Touch Play Youcan turn on the recorder and TV set the TV s input to the recorder and start playback with one touch of the C gt play button page 67 One Touch Menu Youcan turn on the recorder and TV set the TV to the recorder s programme position and display the Title List menu with one touch of the TITLE LIST button page 67 pue sdnyooy For settings
233. e dubbing mode will be adjusted Do you want to continue Select and go to step 9 To manually select another dubbing mode select Cancel and go to step 8 Guiqqng gt continued 89 Notes You cannot make a recording while DV dubbing The DV IN jack is for input only It will not output signals You cannot use the DV IN jack when signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel or recorder operation cannot be performed correctly when using a digital video camera see About i LINK on page 123 Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the instructions of Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 65 the input signal is not in DVC SD format Do not connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera even if it has an i LINK jack the images on the tape contain copy protection signals which limit recording f you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 41 Hookups DVD recorder Za o 6 8 Ae oc to DV IN NN Signal flow 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the recording destination If you select DVD insert a disc see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Insert the source DV Digital8 format tape into your digital video camera For the recorder to record or edit your digital video camera must be set to video playback mode Buiqq
234. e the timer recording starts To record on a DVD See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To make more detailed timer settings See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 61 To stop recording during timer recording Press B REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording and that the recording cannot be stopped within the first minute of recording Setting the timer manually Kani o buttons Sooo Colour buttons M ENTER REC REC STOP 1 With the GUIDE Plus system turned off press SCHEDULE 2 Press the green button Manual BBC2 25 May 10 10 Back Next Home Please enter the recording date and press the green button to confirm n 215 May CC LT Grid Scarch MyTv_ LSchedue No programmes Media Freq Mode HDD Once HQ Promotional Panel 3 Set the date using the number buttons and lt gt Then press the green button Next 4 Set the start time using the number buttons and lt 4 Then press the green button Next D Setthe stop time using the number buttons and lt 4 Then press the green button Next 1 14
235. e what kind of media can be used with the function being explained Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote You can also use the controls on the recorder if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote The on screen display illustrations used in this manual may not match the graphics displayed on your TV screen The explanations regarding DVDs in this manual refer to DVDs created on this recorder The explanations do not apply to DVDs that are created on other recorders and played back on this recorder Disposal of Old Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources For more detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local Civic Office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product Precautions This
236. ea Oupurof vO wrte us voo Powersupply input Dita no Powersupply input 10V Output of interrupt regasi voos Powersupply 33V m Im iosa Input for DTT IRQ signal ME spam 10 C KTDK VO ADDATABI 1 0 Output of data signal 1 for EPROM Vo Vo Vo 5 mo pis o EW m Output of reset signal for HDD AT2DATA 7 Input output of data 7 for HDD driver 5 9 Input output transmission data me 1 1 1 1 Pinno o vs pa pb SSCS ws pa boemo Powersupply input Digial Mu Power supply input Digi 25V 7 wm awar ns _ DN _ __ _ v Powersupply Ni vs pa ws ian O ws boemo O ws 7 __ N3 N4 N5 N12 N13 N14 N15 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 Pl P2 pa P4 P5 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 RI R2 R3 Output of audio L R clock signal EN C voos
237. ear depending upon the condition of the recording or when playing a title recorded in the HQ or HSP recording mode The picture freezes for a few seconds when you use fast forward fast reverse or instant replay advance 2 yoegheld You can also play a DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD CD DATA DVD or DATA CD while recording on the HDD Example Play another title on the HDD while recording to the HDD 1 while recording press TITLE LIST to display the HDD Title List 2 Select the title you want to play and press ENTER 3 Select Play from the sub menu and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title Example Play a DVD while recording to the HDD 1 While recording press DVD and insert the DVD into the recorder 2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD Title List 3 Select the title you want to play and press ENTER 4 Select Play from the sub menu and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title Note You cannot play a DVD DivX video or VIDEO CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while recording on the HDD When playing a DivX video or VIDEO CD be sure to set Colour System to PAL in the Video setup page 103 71 Searching for Title Chapter Track etc HDD ES EXTUS You can search disc by title chapter scene or track As titles and tracks are assigned individual numbers select the
238. ec 30 sec 15 sec EP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx min 60 min 60 60 40 sec min in 3 mi 3 15 sec min 3 min 3 SLP Approx Approx Approx Approx Approx 1 min 60 56 sec 60 60 203 3 053 15 sec min min min 1 values in the above table for reference only Actual times for dubbing also require time for creating disc s control information and other data 2 This is the maximum recording speed of this recorder The recording speed cannot exceed the value indicated in the above table even when using discs that support higher recording speeds In addition depending on the disc condition the recorder may be unable to record at the maximum recording speed indicated in the table High speed dubbing is not available when dubbing titles recorded in EP and SLP mode to DVD RWs and DVD Rs 86 Notes High speed Dubbing is not available for the following titles Titles recorded in HQ Titles that contain both main and sub sounds except DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Titles recorded in mixed picture size 4 3 and 16 9 etc except DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Dubbing from DVD to HDD Dubbing 16 9 size title from HDD to DVD RW DVD R When dubbing a title with a picture size of 16 9 recorded in LP EP or SLP mode to DVD RW or DVD R in Video mode When dubbed to a DVD RW Video mode DVD RW DVD R DVD R Video mode the
239. ecorder Select this to run the Easy Setup programme 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER 3 Select Easy Setup and press ENTER amp SETUP Basic Video Audio Recording DVD Others Easy Setup Begin Easy Setup 4 Select Start 5 Follow the instructions for Easy Setup page 25 from step 2 Hint If you select Others in DVD Menu Subtitle or Audio select and enter a language code from Language Code List on page 127 using the number buttons Q Note If you select a language in DVD Menu Subtitle or Audio that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected Format DVD RW DVD RW only The recorder automatically starts formatting in VR mode or Video mode whichever is selected below when a new unformatted DVD RW is inserted VR Automatically formats the disc in VR mode Video Automatically formats the disc in Video mode One Touch Dubbing Displays the following options for the One Touch Dub function Finalise Disc for all recordable discs except DVD RW in VR mode Selects whether or not to finalise the disc automatically following One Touch Dubbing page 93 Auto Automatically finalises the disc following One Touch Dubbing Manual Allows you to finalise the disc manually
240. ecorder to i LINK compatible equipment having two or more i LINK jacks DV jacks see the instruction manual of the equipment to be connected About the name i LINK i LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY and is a trademark approved by many corporations IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Specifications System Laser Semiconductor laser Channel coverage PAL SECAM B G D K I L VHF E2 to E12 R1 to R12 F2 to F10 Italian A to H Ireland A to J South Africa 4 to 13 UHF E21 to E69 R21 to R69 B21 to B69 F21 to F69 CATV S01 to S05 S1 to S20 France BtoQ HYPER 521 to S41 The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances For details see Receivable channels page 97 Video reception Frequency synthesizer system Audio reception Split carrier system Aerial out 75 ohm asymmetrical aerial socket Timer Clock Quartz locked Timer indication 24 hour cycle digital Power back up duration 1 hour Video recording format MPEG 2 MPEG 1 Audio recording format applicable bit rate Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps 128 kbps in EP and SLP mode jEuonippy gt 121 i LINK baud rate i LINK maximum baud rate varies according to the equipme
241. ecorder automatically selects a dubbing mode with lower picture quality according to the available space If there is insufficient disc space in the selected dubbing mode the following display appears after step 8 Title Dubbing There is not enough memory The dubbing mode will be adjusted Do you want to continue OK gt Cancel Select OK and go to step 8 To manually select another dubbing mode select Cancel and go to step 7 To stop dubbing Press OPTIONS to select Stop Dubbing and press ENTER When asked for confirmation select OK and press ENTER When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free disc space for DVD Rs DVD Rs Hint You can turn off the recorder during dubbing The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off 1 22 Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles A maximum of 30 selected titles can be dubbed at once 1 Insert the DVD that you are going to dub to or from 2 Press HDD or DVD to select the source 3 Press TITLE LIST Press gt to switch the Title Lists if necessary Press OPTIONS to select Dub Selected Titles and press ENTER 5 Select titles in the order you want to dub and press ENTER The titles are numbered in the selected order To cancel the selection press ENTER again cancel all of the
242. effect when audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks or LINE 1 TV LINE 3 DECODER jack If the sampling frequency is 96 kHz signals are simply converted to analogue signals and output Ifthe HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with 96 kHz signals 48 kHz PCM will be automatically output even when you select 96kHz 24bit Audio HDMI Selects the type of audio signal output from the HDMI OUT jack Normally select this position Outputs the optimum audio signal that can be received by the TV based on the Digital Out setting page 104 Converts Dolby Digital or 96 kHz PCM signals to 48 kHz 16 bit PCM Q Notes A loud noise or no sound will be output if you connect the recorder to a TV that is not compatible with DOLB Y DIGITAL DTS signals and is selected In this case select PCM Set Digital Out to On when outputting compressed audio signals to an HDMI compatible TV pue continued 1 05 TV Direct Rec HDD DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R only Selects whether to directly start recording using the SMARTLINK feature page 34 This setting is effective only when you connect the recorder to your TV via the SCART jacks Allows you to easily record what you are watching on the TV Turns off the TV Direct Rec function Synchro Rec Selects the recording destination used for Synchro Recording page
243. es or DivX video files 8 cm DVD RW DVD RW DVD R 8 DVD RW DVD RW and DVD R recorded with a DVD video camera Still images recorded with a DVD video camera cannot be played DVD VIDEO and CD are trademarks DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX Inc and are used under license DivX is a video file compression technology developed by DivX Inc Discs that cannot be played PHOTO CDs CD ROMSs CD Rs CD RWs that are recorded in a format different from the formats mentioned in the table above Data part of CD Extras DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD Rs that do not contain DVD Video DivX video or JPEG image files DVD Audio discs Cartridge only type DVD RAMs and or DVD RAMs that do not contain DVD Video HD layer on Super Audio CDs DVD VIDEOS with a different region code page 11 DVDs that were recorded on a different recorder and not correctly finalised 1 2 Usable disc versions as of August 2006 8x speed or slower DVD RWs 6x speed or slower DVD RWs Ver 1 1 Ver 1 2 with 2 16x speed or slower DVD Rs 16x speed or slower DVD Rs Ver 2 0 2 1 with 2 8x speed or slower DVD R DL Double Layer discs DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R DL and DVD R are trademarks 1 When an unformatted DVD R is inserted into this recorder it is automatically f
244. ess ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if point B is correct If point B is incorrect select point B using and press ENTER display asks for confirmation To reset point A press 4 and RETURN and go to step 2 To reset point B press 4 and repeat step 4 To preview the title without scenes to be erased select Preview except for DVD RWs 6 Select OK and press ENTER The scene is erased The display for setting point A appears To continue go to step 2 To finish select Quit t Hint A chapter mark is inserted after the scene was erased The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters on either side of the mark Notes Images or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the point where you erase a section of a title Sections shorter than five seconds may not be erased For DVD RWs the erased section may be slightly different from the points you selected 1 Press TITLE LIST If the Title List Original appears press lt 2 Press OPTIONS to select Create Playlist and press ENTER Create a Playlist Select a title Total Scenes Preview OK Cance lt Select 3 Select Select and press ENTER Title selection Cancel Select a title 4 Tennis Thu 20 4 gt 3 Travel 10 4 2 Mystery Sun 2 4 1 World Sports Thu 30 3
245. ets the picture size when playing back a title recorded from 16 9 size video page 60 or a 16 9 size commercial DVD video Select the playback picture size according to the type of connected TV wide screen wide mode TV or conventional 4 3 screen TV 16 9 Select this when connecting to a wide screen TV or TV with a wide mode function 4 3 Letter Box Select this when connecting to a 4 3 screen TV Displaysa wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen 4 3 Pan Scan Select this when connecting to a 4 3 screen TV Automatically displays a wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit Scart Setting Sets the method of inputting outputting signals from the SCART jacks on the rear panel of the recorder Select an option for each of the items below according to the combination of jacks and methods that you are going to use Line1 Output Selects a method of outputting video signals for the LINE 1 TV jack Outputs RGB signals Outputs video signals Outputs S video signals Notes If your TV does not accept S video or RGB signals the image will not be displayed in the selected method on the TV screen even if you select 5 Video or RGB See the instructions supplied with your TV You cannot select RGB when Component Out above is set to SMARTLINK is available only when Video is selected
246. f the programme may not be recorded regardless of whether or not the recorder s power is on or off During Synchro Recording other operations such as normal recording cannot be performed To use the connected equipment while the recorder is standing by for Synchro Recording cancel Synchro Recording by pressing gt SYNCHRO REC Be sure to turn off the connected equipment and press gt SYNCHRO REC to reset Synchro Recording before the timer recording starts The Synchro Rec function does not work when Line3 Input of Scart Setting is set to Decoder in the Video setup page 103 The Synchro Rec function does not work with some tuners For details see the tuner s operating instructions While the recorder is standing by for Synchro Recording the Auto Clock Set function page 100 does not work To use the Synchro Rec function you must first set the recorder s clock correctly If the timer settings of a Synchro Recording and another timer recording overlap Regardless of whether or not the programme is a Synchro Rec programme the programme that starts first has priority and the second programme starts recording only after the first programme has finished 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 First programme Second will be cut off 3 Select the title and press ENTER sub menu appears 4 Select and press ENTER Playback starts from the
247. f your TV is connected to the gt LINE 1 TV jack set your TV to the TV input using the TV DVD button and select the programme you want to watch If your TV is connected to the LINE 2 OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks set the TV to TV input using the TV button page 22 TV Direct Rec If you are using the SMARTLINK connection and the Direct Rec is to page 107 you can easily record what you are watching on your TV When the TV and the recorder are turned on press REC The recorder starts recording what you are watching on your TV Note If TV appears in the front panel display you cannot turn off the TV or change the programme position during TV Direct Rec To turn off the function set TV Direct Rec to in the Recording setup page 107 About the Teletext function Some broadcast systems ensure a Teletext service in which the complete programmes and their data title date programme position recording start time etc are stored day by day When recording a programme the recorder automatically takes the programme name from the Teletext pages and stores it as the title name For details see Auto Programme Title Labelling TV Guide Page on page 99 Note that the Teletext information will not appear on your TV screen To view the Teletext information on your TV screen press TV DVD on the remote to switch the input source to your TV page 22 n
248. fault Diagnostic checks in the Service Mode 6 3 Items and Description of Service Mode Menu 1 When key 1 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Version No check menu screen 2 When key 2 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Display Color check menu screen 3 When the key 3 15 pressed down the monitor display moves to the Total Time check menu screen 4 When the key 4715 pressed down the monitor display moves to the Error History check menu screen 5 When key 5 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Command History check menu screen 6 When the key 0 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the History Clear check menu screen 7 When the key 7 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the Factory Set Up check menu screen 8 When the key 8 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the hard disk check menu screen lt lt MAIN MENU gt gt 1 Version No 2 Display Color Total Time Error History Command History History Clear Factory Set Up Device Check HDD MODE 0 G code Setting MODEL KKK SYSCON Version gt sk HDD Serial ID xx Sony ID k kk 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 When key 9 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the hard disk check menu screen 0 When key 0 is pressed down the monitor display moves to the G cod
249. g card heart A disc with a label or sticker on it A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker adhesive on it On replacement of parts In the event that this unit is repaired repaired parts may be collected for reuse or recycling purposes About i LINK The DV IN jack on this recorder is i LINK compliant for digital video cameras This section describes the i LINK standard and its features What is i LINK i LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video digital audio and other data in two directions between equipment having the i LINK jack and for controlling other equipment i LINK compatible equipment can be connected by a single i LINK cable Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment When two or more i LINK compatible equipment are connected to this recorder in a daisy chain operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this recorder is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected equipment Note however that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment Note Normally only one piece of equipment can be connected to this recorder by the i LINK cable DV connecting cable When connecting this r
250. g a single title Title Dubbing page 88 or Dubbing multiple titles Dub Selected Titles page 89 When dubbing multiple titles all of the selected titles will be recorded in same recording mode t Hint Dubbing in the recording mode of the source title smoothes out the seams that are left over from editing Notes For a title whose picture size 16 9 or 4 3 is mixed When dubbed from the HDD to DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode the picture size is determined by the setting in DVD Rec Picture Size page 60 When dubbed from the HDD to DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode in LP EP or SLP mode the picture size is always 4 3 When dubbed from HDD to DVD RW DVD R the picture size is always 4 3 The picture quality will not improve even if a title is converted to a recording mode of better picture quality Q Notes You cannot make a recording while dubbing To play a dubbed disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 41 e You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOS to the HDD Thumbnails that you have set for the originally recorded title page 36 will not be retained in the dubbed title When dubbing to a DVD R DL disc the video may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch About Dub Mode With this recorder the recording mode for dubbing is displayed as Dub Mode Three dubbing methods are available High speed Dubbing Original Dubbing and Rec
251. g and Editing a Yes Yes Yes Yes No Playlist page 81 Change Order page 83 No No No Yes No Combine page 83 No Yes No Yes No DVD RW only Thumbnail Changes the title s thumbnail picture that appears in the Title List page 36 Make a Playlist Adds the entire title to the Playlist title as one scene page 83 Hints Youcan erase multiple titles at one time page 79 You can automatically erase titles that have already played page 107 Youcan label or re label DVDs page 40 Note DVD RW DVD R VR mode playlist titles cannot be protected Erasing multiple titles Erase Titles HDD GU You can select and erase more than one title at one time using the OPTIONS menu Press TITLE LIST For HDD titles or DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode press to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Press OPTIONS to select Erase Titles and press ENTER The display for selecting titles to be erased appears Erase Titles Select the titles to erase 4 Tennis 20 4 4 3 Travel 10 4 2 Sun 2 4 1 World Sports Thu 30 3 3 Select a title and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box next to the selected title To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all of check marks select Reset 4 Repeat step 3 to select al
252. g down to two channels when you play a DVD which has rear sound elements channels or is recorded in Dolby Digital format For details on the rear signal components see 4 Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information on page 37 This function affects the output of the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE I TV jack LINE 3 DECODER jack DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL HDMI OUT jack when Dolby Digital is set to D PCM page 104 Dolby Normally select this position Surround Multi channel audio signals are output to two channels for enjoying surround sounds Normal Multi channel audio signals are downmixed to two channels for use with your stereo Audio Connection The following setup items switch the method of outputting audio signals when you connect a component such as an amplifier receiver with a digital input jack For connection details see Step 3 Connecting the Audio Cords on page 20 Select Dolby Digital MPEG DTS A8kHz 96kHz PCM and Audio HDMI after setting Digital Out to On If you connect a component that does not accept the selected audio signal a loud noise or no sound will come out from the speakers and may affect your ears or cause speaker damage 1 Select Audio Connection Audio and press ENTER Audio Audio Connection Digital Out
253. h Dolby Digital 3 2 1 Front L R Centre LFE Low Frequency Effect 4 The current selected angle 5 Disc type format page 8 6 Tide type only appears for Playlists Play mode Recording mode page 54 9 Playing status bar gt Title number page 72 Shows either track number scene number or file number for CDs VIDEO CDs DATA DVDs or DATA CDs 11 Album name appears for DATA DVDs or DATA CDs 12 Playing time 1 Displays Super VIDEO CDs as SVCD DATA 2 CDs as CD and DATA DVDs as DVD Does not appear with VIDEO CDs DATA DVDs and DATA CDs Hints If DTS of Audio Connection is set to Off in HDD only were recorded The title that is recorded most recently and has not been played is listed at the top Playlist titles are not displayed To change a title thumbnail picture Thumbnail HDD DVD RW DVD R in VR mode only You can select a favourite scene for the thumbnail picture shown in the Title List menu 1 Press TITLE LIST Press lt to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Selecta title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select Set Thumbnail and press ENTER The display for setting the thumbnail point appears and the title starts to play 4 While watching the playback picture press lt lt 4 PP to select the scene you want to set for a thumbnail picture and press ENTER Playback pauses 5 Press ENTER if
254. h a compatible set top box receiver see the instructions supplied with the set top box receiver If you want to use the Synchro Rec function A SCART connection between the set top box receiver and the recorder is necessary to use the Synchro Recording function See Recording from connected equipment with a timer Synchro Rec on page 63 Set Line3 Input of Scart Setting in the Video setup page 103 according to the specifications of your set top box receiver See your set top box receiver s instructions for more information Using the set top box receiver control function The set top box receiver control function can be used with hookup A or B It allows the recorder to control a set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller The recorder controls programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording You can also use the recorder 5 remote control to change programme positions on the set top box receiver whenever the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on To use the set top box receiver control function you need to connect the set top box controller page 25 After setting up the set top box receiver control check that the recorder can correctly control the set top box receiver page 26 Q Notes f your aerial is a flat cable 300 twin lead cable use an external aerial connector not supplied to connect the aerial to the recorder f you have separate cables for AERI
255. han ten minutes the recording mode indication may be displayed incorrectly Note that the actual recording or dubbing itself was correctly made in the selected recording mode gt After playing titles recorded in EP and SLP mode the recording mode indication may change depending on the recorded programme The clock does not appear in the front panel display when the recorder is turned off gt Dimmer in the Others setup is set to Save Power page 110 Remote control The remote does not function gt Batteries are weak gt The remote is too far from the recorder gt The remote 5 manufacturer code returned to the default setting when you replaced the batteries Reset the code page 22 gt The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the recorder gt Different command modes set for the recorder and remote Set the same command mode page 23 The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 gt Press stop on the unit while the recorder is turned off to check the current command mode Others The recorder does not operate properly gt Restart the recorder Press down on the recorder for more than ten seconds until WELCOME appears in the front panel display gt When static electricity etc causes the recorder to operate abnormally turn off the recorder and wait until the clock appears in the front panel display T
256. hanged the channels The picture from equipment connected to the recorder s input jack does not appear on the screen gt Ifthe equipment is connected to the LINE 1 TV jack select L1 in the front panel display by pressing PROG or INPUT SELECT If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN jacks select 1 27 in the front panel display by pressing PROG or INPUT SELECT If the equipment is connected to the LINE 3 DECODER jack select 1 37 in the front panel display by pressing PROG or INPUT SELECT If the equipment is connected to the DV IN jack this is usually for a digital video camera connection select DV in the front panel display by pressing INPUT SELECT The playback picture or TV programme from the equipment connected through the recorder is distorted gt If the playback picture output from a DVD player VCR or tuner goes through your recorder before reaching your TV the copy protection signal applied to some programmes could affect picture quality Disconnect the playback equipment in question and connect it directly to your TV The picture does not fill the screen gt Set TV Type ofthe Video Output in the Video setup in accordance with the screen size of your TV page 101 gt 11 3 gt Any discs other than the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode cannot be used for recording both ma
257. he captured scenes in the listed order select Preview 1 1 finish editing the scene list select OK and press ENTER The title of the created Playlist is added to the Title List Playlist The title name is the title name of the first scene Hint When a Playlist title is created the IN and OUT points will become chapter marks and each scene will become a chapter 1 20 Greating chapters manually HDD EU You can manually insert a chapter mark at any point you like during playback or recording Press CHAPTER MARK at the point where you want to divide the title into chapters Each time you press the button Marking appears on the screen and the scenes to the left and right of the mark become separate chapters To erase chapter marks Youcan combine two chapters by erasing the chapter mark during playback Press 144 W to search for a chapter number and while displaying the chapter containing the chapter mark you want to erase press CHAPTER MARK ERASE The current chapter combines with the previous chapter Q Notes When dubbing any chapter marks you enter will be erased To insert a chapter mark manually during recording set Auto Chapter to Off in the Recording setup page 107 Note The picture may pause when the edited scene is played To add the entire title to the Playlist title as one scene Make a Playlist 1 Press TITLE LIST
258. he disc types in the table below Differences between the disc types Discs are automatically finalised when removed from the recorder However you may need to finalise the disc for certain DVD equipment or if the recording time is short You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising RW m gt n i 1 3 ec m 7 5 lt J rJ i a Finalising is unnecessary when playing a disc on VR format compatible equipment Even if your other DVD equipment is VR format compatible you may need to finalise the disc especially if the recording time is short You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising Finalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc If you want to record on it again unfinalise page 43 or reformat the disc page 43 However if you reformat the disc all recorded contents will be erased Finalising is necessary The disc can be played only on equipment that supports DVD R in VR mode After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc using this recorder continued 8 Reformatting a disc EU New discs are automatically formatted when inserted If necessary you can manually re format a DVD RW or DVD RW disc to make a blank disc For DVD RWs
259. he title names may not appear for DVDs created on other DVD recorders 4 Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information HDD RWvideo cD DATA DVD IDATA Sorted By Date In order of when the titles were recorded The title that is recorded most recently is listed at the top By Title In alphabetical order By Number In order of recorded title number Unseen Title In order of when the titles t may take a few seconds for the thumbnail pictures to be displayed After editing the title thumbnail picture may You can check the playing time of the current title chapter track or disc Also you can check the disc name recorded on the DVD CD To stop playback Press stop To scroll the list display by page Page mode Press lt e e gt while the list display is turned on Each time you press 4 e e gt the entire Title List changes to the next previous page of titles About the Title List for HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode You can switch the Title List to show Original or Playlist titles While the Title List menu is turned on press lt 2 Available functions for DVD VIDEOs 1 audio subtitle etc playback data for DVDs and DATA CDs The current selected function or audio setting appears only temporarily Example Dolby Digital 5 1 ch Rear L R gt 1 Englis
260. hen unplug the recorder and after leaving it off for a while plug it in again Five numbers or letters are displayed in the front panel display gt The self diagnosis function was activated see the table on page 120 The disc tray does not open after you press open close gt It may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have recorded or edited a DVD This is because the recorder is adding disc data to the disc There is no DVD inside the recorder There is not enough disc space for the recording The set top box was turned off The set top box controller was incorrectly connected page 13 The settings in Setup in the Menu bar have been changed page 50 The recorder was in the process of dubbing The recorder was in the process of DV Dubbing VV V VV ii Recording does not stop immediately after you press REC STOP gt It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input disc data before recording can stop Recording does not stop after you press gt Press REC STOP Timer recording is not complete or did not start from the beginning gt There was a power failure during recording If the power recovers when there is a timer recording the recorder resumes recording Should the power failure continue for more than 1 hour reset the clock page 100 gt Other timer setting overlapped the timer setting page 63 gt Di
261. here is no sound or if the picture is distorted the wrong tuner system may have been preset during Easy Setup Set the correct tuner system manually in the steps below Tuning the French CATV channels This recorder can scan the CATV channels B to Q and the HYPER frequency channels S21 to 541 On the Channel Set menu the channels are indicated as 51 to 544 For example channel B is indicated by Channel Set number 51 and channel Q is indicated by Channel Set number S23 see the table below If the CATV channel you want to preset is indicated by its frequency for example 152 75 MHZ refer to the table below to find the corresponding channel number Corre Channel Receivable sponding Set Frequency channel number range MHz B 51 116 75 124 75 52 124 75 132 75 D S3 132 75 140 75 D S4 140 75 148 75 E S5 148 75 156 75 F S6 156 75 164 75 F S7 164 75 172 75 G S8 172 75 180 75 H S9 180 75 188 75 510 188 75 196 75 511 196 75 204 75 1 512 204 75 212 75 1 513 212 75 220 75 K S14 220 75 228 75 L S15 228 75 236 75 L 516 236 75 244 75 M S17 244 75 252 75 N 518 252 75 260 75 N S19 260 75 268 75 520 268 75 276 75 P 521 276 75 284 75 522 284 75 292 75 Q S23 292 75 300 75 521 524 299 25 307 25 522 525 307 25 315 25 523 526 315 25 323 25 524 527 323 25 331 25 Select Programme Setting in
262. his check confirms that the B Y signal of the component video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input connector terminated in 750 Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to ON 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p Test point Instrument Specification 700 50 Fig 7 5 6 Component Video Output R Y Pr Check Purpose This check confirms that the R Y signal of the component video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input Mode PLAY Signal 100 Color bars Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Pr connector terminated in 750 700 Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to ON 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p nandi 700 50 Fig 7 6 7 ScartVideo Output Level Check lt Purpose gt This check is made to satisfy the PAL signal standard If it is adjusted incorrectly brightness will be too bright or too dark
263. ier or the connection to the amplifier is incorrect gt gt 4 The recorder is in reverse play fast forward slow motion or pause mode If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL HDMI OUT jacks check the Audio Connection settings in the Audio setup page 104 The recorder supports only MP3 audio and MPEG audio for DivX video files Press AUDIO and select MP3 audio or MPEG audio There is no picture the picture noise appears when connected to the HDMI OUT jack gt Try the following the recorder off and on again the connected equipment off and on again Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cord again gt If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video output changing HDMI Resolution setting of Video Output in the Video setup may solve the problem page 101 Connect the TV and the recorder using a video jack other than the HDMI OUT and switch the TV s input to the connected video input so that you can see the on screen displays Change the HDMI Resolution setting of Video Output in the Video setup and switch the TV s input back to HDMI If the picture still does not appear repeat the steps and try other options gt The recorder is connected to an input device that is not HDCP compliant page 17 gt Depending on the setting combination for and 4 3 Output the edge of
264. iles with the extension jpeg or jpg JPEG image files that conform to the DCF image file format DivX video file with the extension avi or divx Design rule for Camera File system Image standards for digital cameras regulated by JEITA Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association Q Notes Therecorder will play any data with the extension mp3 jpeg jpg avi or divx even if they are not in MP3 JPEG or DivX format Playing these data may generate a loud noise which could damage your speaker system The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in mp3PRO format The recorder may not play a DivX video file when the file has been combined from two or more DivX video files Depending on the disc normal playback may not be possible For example the picture may be unclear playback may not appear smooth the sound may skip and so on Depending on the disc playback may take some time to start Some files cannot be played 2 Press For MP3 discs playback starts from the first MP3 audio track on the disc For JPEG files a slideshow of the pictures on the disc begins For DivX video files playback starts from the first DivX video file on the disc If the disc contains MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files only the DivX video files are played back when D gt is pressed If the disc contains MP3 audio
265. in DVD and press ENTER f you have not entered a password the display for registering a new password appears DVD Parental Control Enter a new password Remote Gontrol Settings Factory Settings Others The Others setup allows you to set up other operational settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode Select SETUP and press ENTER Select Others and press ENTER The Others setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined co N 2 SETUP Basic Dimmer Normal Video Command Mode DVD3 Audio Registration Code Recording Factory Setup DVD Format Others Easy Setup Dimmer Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display Bright lighting Save Power Low lighting Turns off the lighting when the power is off Command Mode Changes the Command Mode of the recorder if other DVD equipment is assigned the same Command Mode For details see If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder on page 23 Registration Code Displays the registration code of DivX video files for this recorder For more information go to http www divx com vod on the Internet When you have already registered a password the display for entering the password appears DVD Parental Control Enter your password GC
266. in and sub sounds To record on the HDD set Bilingual Recording of the HDD Rec Settings in the Recording setup to Sub page 106 gt If you have connected an AV amplifier to the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack and want to change the audio track for HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode during playback set Dolby Digital of the Audio Connection in the Audio setup to D PCM page 104 Playback The recorder does not play any type of disc except HDD gt The disc is upside down Insert the disc with the labelled side facing up gt The disc is not correctly inserted gt Moisture has condensed inside the recorder In this case if the recorder is on leave it on if it is off leave it off for about an hour until the moisture evaporates gt Ifthe disc was recorded on another recorder and was not finalised page 41 the recorder cannot play the disc The recorder does not start playback from the beginning gt Resume play was activated page 67 gt Youhaveinserteda DVD whose Title menu or DVD menu automatically appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted Use the menu to start playback The recorder starts playing automatically gt The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback function Playback stops automatically gt If the DVD has an auto pause signal the recorder stops playback at the auto pause signal EUORIPPY
267. ing website and set the host channel manually page 52 www europe guideplus com If the host channel has changed or moved the programme guide data cannot be received In this case follow the steps in Searching for the GUIDE Plus host channel page 51 to update the host channel setting If you made connection Connecting a set top box receiver using a SCART cord only page 15 and did not connect an aerial cable from your set top box receiver to the recorder do the following Turn on your set top box receiver Connect the set top box controller Follow the steps in Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually page 52 to set the host channel manually Be sure to set your set top box receiver tuner as the source Q Notes Your set top box receiver s programme position may suddenly change even if the recorder is turned off This is because the set top box controller has changed the programme position to receive the GUIDE Plus data When you set Factory Setup to All the recorder is initialized When you change the following settings the GUIDE Plus system is reset Country region setting in Easy Setup Country of Setup Basic Setup in the Menu Bar Postal code setting in Easy Setup Postal Code of Setup Basic Setup in the Menu Bar Note that the GUIDE Plus system is also reset when you make changes to the host channe
268. instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment To record on this recorder see Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 65 Connecting to the LINE 3 DECODER jack Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 3 DECODER jack of this recorder VCR TV 4 SCART cord not supplied QD to SCART input to LINE 1 TV COMPONENT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT DOLBY DIGITAL E37 HOMI OUT eee Wo sync IDECODER Tem T LINK COAXIAL _ OPTICAL LINE 2 OUT DVD recorder Notes Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below To watch video tapes watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV Line input 1 VCR DVD recorder The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder s LINE 3 DECODER jack When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the TV DVD button on the remote f you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected VCR 28 Connecting a
269. it operates on 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Check that the unit s operating voltage is identical with your local power supply To prevent fire or shock hazard do not place objects filled with liquids such as vases on the apparatus Install this system so that the mains lead can be unplugged from the wall socket immediately in the event of trouble GUIDE Plus SuowViEw G LINK are 1 registered trademarks or trademarks of 2 manufactured under license from and 3 subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by or licensed to Gemstar TV Guide International Inc and or its related affiliates GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC AND OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS SYSTEM IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC AND OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION EQUIPMENT OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS SYSTEM About this manual n this manual the internal hard disk drive is written as HDD and disc is used as general reference for the HDD DVDs or CDs unless otherwise specified by the text or illustrations Icons such as listed at the top of each explanation indicat
270. itle is fixed The picture is black and white gt Check that Linel Output of the Scart Setting in the Video setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system page 103 gt If you are using a SCART cord be sure to use one that is fully wired 21 pins GUIDE Plus system GUIDE Plus system does not appear gt DEven if you complete Easy Setup TV programme listings do not appear until the recorder receives the GUIDE Plus data Turm off the recorder but do not unplug it Wait for 24 hours It may take several days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE Plus data for all programme positions If the recorder does not receive the GUIDE Plus data after 24 hours set the host channel manually page 52 gt The country region or postal code is incorrect Correctly set your country region and postal code page 50 gt The host channel setup for your set top box receiver is incorrect Set the host channel manually page 52 gt When the recorder is connected to a set top box receiver the set top box receiver must be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus data gt Area numbers that cannot be received using GUIDE Plus are set Select Easy Setup from SETUP in the System Menu and follow the on screen instructions to make the settings again page 25 gt The Time Lock function on your cable box is activated Set this function to off gt If the ho
271. l settings or if you set Factory Setup to Basic 1 11 GUIDE Plus Introduction to the GUIDE Plus System The GUIDE Plus system is a free interactive programme guide It displays up to seven days of programme listings including programme titles promotions and broadcast information GUIDE Plus data for the television programme listings are carried by your local broadcast host channel and are received through your aerial set top box receiver or direct cable connection from the wall Visit www europe guideplus com for a list of all European host channels These are just a few of the ways to use the GUIDE Plus system Search for a programme by listing them according to category such as Movies or Sports or by using the Keyword Search function page 49 Once you have found the programme you are looking for use the GUIDE Plus system to set the timer for recording page 56 You can set the system to display your favourite programmes according to conditions that you set such as category and keyword page 49 For more information see Watching TV using the GUIDE Plus System page 47 Watching TV using the GUIDE Plus System Colour buttons TV GUIDE GG 9 4 gt D DAY Ome DAY e Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Home Screen appears Channels Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rache s choice of
272. l of the titles you want to erase continued 77 5 When you finish selecting titles select OK and press ENTER The list of the titles to be erased appears for confirmation To change the selection select Change and repeat from step 3 Select OK and press ENTER The titles are erased To erase all titles on the disc You can reformat the HDD DVD RW or DVD RW to make the disc or drive blank To format the HDD see Format on page 110 format a DVD RW or DVD RW disc see 8 Reformatting a disc on page 43 Erasing a section of a title A B Erase HDD EUD EMS You can select a section scene in a title and erase it Note that erasing scenes in a title cannot be undone pue uiseig 1 After step 2 of Erasing and Editing a Title select Erase and press ENTER The display for setting point A appears The title starts to play To return to the beginning of the title press and then press Ke A B Erase Set point A 1 World Sports jJ Preview Playback point 2 Select point A using lt lt gt gt and press ENTER Playback pauses gt continued 79 80 82 3 Press ENTER if point A is correct If point A is incorrect select point A using and press ENTER display for setting point B appears 4 Select point using lt lt gt gt and pr
273. lows 0 Minutes 10 Minutes 30 Minutes 60 Minutes VPS PDC 0 Minutes See About PDC VPS function below HDD Rec Picture Size DVD Rec Picture Size Sets the picture size of the programme to be recorded 4 3 default Sets the picture size to 4 3 16 9 Sets the picture size to 16 9 wide mode Auto HDD only Automatically selects the actual picture size DVD Rec Picture Size works with DVD RWSs DVD Rs Video mode when the recording mode is set to HQ HSP SP LSP or ESP For all other recording modes the screen size is fixed at 4 3 For DVD Rs DVD RWs VR mode actual picture size is recorded regardless of the setting For example if a 16 9 size picture is received the disc records the picture as 16 9 even if DVD Rec Picture Size is set to 4 3 For DVD RWs DVD Rs the screen size is fixed at 4 3 NR noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the video signal Rec Video Equalizer Adjusts the picture in greater detail Press 44 to select you want to adjust then press ENTER Contrast Changes the contrast Brightness Changes the overall brightness Colour Makes the colours deeper or lighter 3 Adjust the setting using lt 4 gt and press ENTER The default setting is underlined Rec NR weak Off 1 2 3 strong Video Equalizer Contrast
274. matically formatted in Video mode To format an unused DVD R in VR mode format the disc using the Disc Information display page 43 before you make a recording If the disc is recordable on this recorder you can manually re format the disc to make a blank disc page 43 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List HDD EUM play a recorded title select the title from the Title List 2 99 P pyp TITLE LIST B3 s TM 1 gt 2 9 ENTER OY e OPTIONS pe 444 9 gt gt Press HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 Playback starts automatically depending on the disc 2 Press TITLE LIST To show the extended Title List press OPTIONS to select Display List and press ENTER 2 Recording a Programme HDD Em ET This section introduces the basic operation to record a current TV programme to the hard disk HDD or to a disc DVD For an explanation of how to make timer recordings see page 54 HDD a R DVD PROG TV DVD OPTIONS DISPLAY REC REC STOP m gt eh 3 n i 1 3 7 5 lt J rJ i a REC MODE 1 Press or DVD If you want to record to a DVD insert a recordable
275. me time When you connect the recorder to your TV via the SCART jacks the TV s input source is set to the recorder automatically when you start playback If necessary press TV to return the input to the TV For correct SMARTLINK connection you will need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins Refer to your TV s instruction manual as well for this connection If you connect this recorder to a TV with SMARTLINK set Easy Setup Linel Output to Video You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack connection to DVI jacks that are not HDCP compliant e g DVI jacks on PC displays This DVD recorder incorporates High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI technology HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC About the SMARTLINK features for SCART connections only If the connected TV or other connected equipment such as a set top box complies with SMARTLINK NexTView Link MEGALOGIC 1 EASYLINK CINEMALINK gt Q Link EURO VIEW LINK or T V LINK you can enjoy the following SMARTLINK features For recording TV Direct Rec You can easily record what you are watching on your TV page 34 One Touch EPG You can turn on the recorder and TV set the TV to the recorder s programme position and display the GUIDE Plus system Home Screen with one touch of the TV GUIDE button Step 2 Connecting th
276. me at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode II pause Pauses playback To resume normal playback press D gt 68 Notes f the outlines of the images on your screen become blurred set BNR and or MNR to Off Depending on the disc or the scene being played the above BNR MNR or FNR effects may be hard to discern And these functions may not work with some screen sizes When using the Sharpness function noise found in the title may become more apparent In this case it is recommended that you use BNR function with the Sharpness function If the condition still does not improve set the Sharpness level to Off Adjusting the delay between the picture and sound AV SYNC HDD Em 173 1 Press OPTIONS during playback to select Audio Settings and press ENTER 2 Select AV SYNC and press ENTER AV SYNC When the video is delayed this function delays the audio for synchronization with the video 0 to 120 milliseconds Larger numbers indicate a longer audio delay for synchronization with the video When dubbing to a VCR or other video recording equipment be sure to return this setting to 0 ms default 3 Press lt gt to adjust the setting and press ENTER 70 Pausing a TV Broadcast TV Pause Pause Live TV You can pause a current TV broadcast and then continue w
277. mote interferes your other Sony DVD recorder or player change the command mode number for this recorder page 23 Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage and corrosion Should leakage occur do not touch the liquid with bare hands Observe the following Do not use a new battery with an old battery or batteries of different manufacturers Do not attempt to recharge the batteries If you do not intend to use the remote for an extended period of time remove the batteries If battery leakage occurs wipe out any liquid inside the battery compartment and insert new batteries Do not expose the remote sensor marked on the front panel to strong light such as direct sunlight or a lighting apparatus The recorder may not respond to the remote When you replace the batteries of the remote the code number and Command Mode may be reset to the default setting Set the appropriate code number and Command Mode again 22 Audio video cord not supplied DVD recorder INPUT VIDEO AUDIO H R red 0 TV AV amplifier receiver Audio L R left right input jacks This connection will use your TV s or stereo amplifier s receiver s two speakers for sound Controlling TVs with the remote You can adjust the remote s signal to control your TV Q Notes Depending on the connected unit you may not be able to control
278. n if it is not set in Programme Setting of Settings and Adjustments even if it is set to in the Editor in the Menu Bar f you are using your set top box receiver to receive programmes connection B page 15 and are able to receive the same programme with both the set top box and the recorder change the Source to receive the programme with the recorder s tuner Recording stereo and bilingual programmes The recorder automatically receives and records stereo and bilingual programmes based on the ZWEITON system or the NICAM system The HDD and a DVD RW VR mode or DVD R VR mode can record both main and sub sounds You can switch between main and sub when playing the disc For the HDD you can select the sound track before recording Select Sub or Main Sub in Bilingual Recording of the HDD Rec Settings in the Recording setup page 106 A DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode can record only one sound track main or sub at atime Select the sound track using the Setup Display before recording starts Set Bilingual Recording of the DVD Rec Settings to Main default or Sub in the Recording setup page 107 ZWEITON German stereo system When a stereo based programme is received Stereo appears When a bilingual ZWEITON based programme is received Main Sub or Main Sub appears NICA
279. n page 73 Buttons Operations AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed repeatedly in normal playback mode HDD ELA E Selects the language DYD HDD Selects the main or sub sound Wah Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly DVD lt gt instant replay instant advance HDD EUD Replays the scene briefly fast forwards the scene 6 previous B gt B gt I next track Goes to the beginning of the previous next title chapter scene For the HDD you cannot go to the beginning of the previous next title 4 fast reverse fast forward playback Fast reverses fast forwards the disc when pressed during Search speed changes as follows fast reverse 4 A lt lt 4 4 fast forward 1 gt gt 1 gt 3 2 When you press and hold the button fast forward fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button 1 When you press gt once during playback of a title recorded in the HDD you can play quickly with sound x1 3 appears 2 443 and 38 are only available for the HDD and DVDs 4111 8 slow freeze frame HDD ETS Playback direction only Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in pause mode Plays one fra
280. nd re enter the correct number gt continued 57 Using the Quick Timer function You can set the recorder to record in 30 minute increments Press REC repeatedly to set the duration Each press advances the time in 30 minute increments The maximum duration is six hours 0 30 1 00 5 30 normal recording 6 00 The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0 00 then the recorder stops recording the power does not turn off Even if you turn off the recorder during recording the recorder continues to record until the time counter runs out Note that the Quick Timer function does not work if TV Direct Rec is set to in the Recording setup page 107 To cancel the Quick Timer Press REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display The recorder returns to normal recording mode gt continued 59 60 62 Adjusting the recording picture quality and size You can adjust the recording picture quality and picture size C Tg p 4 ENTER OPTIONS 1 Before recording starts press OPTIONS to select Rec Settings and press ENTER Rec Settings Select the item you want to change Rec Mode HDD Rec Picture Size DVD Rec Picture Size Rec NR Rec Video Equalizer 2 Select the item you want to adjust and press ENTER The adjustment display a
281. nd the lock indicator appears in the Video Window You cannot unlock the Video Window while recording If you are watching programmes through a set top box the Video Window may not change as fast as you move the cursor In this case lock the Video Window page 47 The screen saver will appear if no buttons are pressed for more than ten minutes 3 Select Channels Categories or Keywords and press the yellow button Add Channels Select the programme position using 4 gt and press ENTER To add more programme positions press the yellow button You can register up to 16 programme positions To cancel the registration select a programme position and press the red button Delete Categories Select the category using II and press ENTER To add more categories press the yellow button You can register up to 4 categories To cancel the registration select a category and press the red button Delete Keywords Enter a keyword See enter a new keyword on page 49 To add more keywords press the yellow button You can register up to 16 keywords To cancel the registration select a keyword and press the red button Delete Press ENTER To change the profile settings 1 2 3 Select in the Menu Bar Press the yellow button Profile Repeat from step 3 above Selecting and watching
282. necting the Mains Lead Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN terminal of the recorder Then plug the recorder and TV mains leads power cords into the mains After you connect the mains lead you must wait for a short while before operating the recorder You can operate the recorder once the front panel display lights up and the recorder enters standby mode If you connect additional equipment to this recorder page 28 be sure to connect the mains lead after all connections are complete suas pue sdnyooH to AC IN gt to mains 21 If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player set the command mode number for this recorder and the supplied remote to one that differs from the other Sony DVD recorder or player after you have completed Step 6 Easy Setup The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 pue o o G9 Number 206 buttons SYSTEM 27 MENU QD 4 ENTER a 1 Check that Easy Setup page 25 has been finished If Easy Setup has not been finished first perform Easy Setup 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select SETUP and press ENTER SETUP Basic gt Programme Setting Video Programme Sort Audio TV Guide Page Recording Clock DVD O
283. ng gt continued 91 92 94 3 Press INPUT SELECT on the remote repeatedly to select DV The front panel display changes as follows programme position L1 L2 gt L3 gt DV 4 Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly to select the recording mode The recording mode changes as follows ee HSP SP _ SLP EP lt LP lt ESP For details about the recording mode see page 54 Press OPTIONS on the remote to select DV Audio Input and press ENTER Then selectthe setting for the audio input Stereol default Records original sound only Normally select this when dubbing a DV format tape Records both stereo 1 and 2 Stereo2 Records additional audio only Select Mix or Stereo2 only if you have added a second audio channel when recording with your digital video camera You are ready to start dubbing Select one of the dubbing methods on the following pages 6 Adjust the dubbing picture quality and size Before dubbing starts press OPTIONS to select Rec Settings and adjust the recording settings page 60 t Hint You can turn off the recorder during dubbing The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off Program Edit HDD EUS EUM US EW Em ars You can select scenes from a DV Digital8 format tape and then automatically record selected scenes to the HDD or a DVD To use this function do the following Gonnect yo
284. ng board 1 2 3 4 10 11 RD 064 BOARD 6 8 A DV PHY NO MARK REC PB MODE REF NO 20 000 SERIES SEE lt XSYSRST 22 4 8 5 8 PHYLPS 22 PHYLREQ 2 C705 75 C710 R733 0 01u 0 01u R709 5 TO 1 9 6 TpBIAS1 E lt lt 4 FR 257 BOARD 9 TO 1 8 3 4 C712 ERO PHYSCLK AVDD 0 01u CN 3 TPA 106 B OU 119 55 L 2 EJ 2 SEE PAGE 4 23 1 GND 0 TpB1p 5 01 0 TpBin PHYCTL 0 gt gt gt DV PHY AGND 701 D gt UPD72852AGB 8EU A PHYDIO O PHYDIO 1 NN PHYDIO 2 22 PHYDIO 3 22 lt PHYDIO 4 22 PHYDIO 5 22 PHYDIO 6 22 PHYDIO 7 22 TpAOn TpBOp TpBOn AGND SUS RES 0 D6 0 07 0 R701 0 gt SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL A C711 AUDIO 0 01u CHROMA Y Y CHROMA SIGNAL X701 SW3 4V 22 gt 24 576 2 715 gt gt gt gt TO 2 8 4 8 Tak 5 8 7 8 uy C706 C707 10u B 6 3V DV PHY RD 064 6 8 4 35 4 36 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1C802 RD 064 BOARD 7 8 PLL R823
285. nt Three maximum baud rates are defined 100 approx 100 Mbps 5200 approx 200 Mbps 5400 approx 400 Mbps The baud rate is listed under Specifications in the instruction manual of each equipment It is also indicated near the i LINK jack on some equipment The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is S100 When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate What is Mbps Mbps stands for megabits per second or the amount of data that can be sent or received in one second For example a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second i LINK functions on this recorder For details on how to dub when this recorder is connected to other video equipment having DV jacks see page 91 The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC SD signals It cannot output signals The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV signals from equipment such as a MICRO digital video camera with an i LINK jack For further precautions see the notes on page 91 For details on precautions when connecting this recorder also see the instruction manuals for the equipment to be connected Required i LINK cable Use the Sony i LINK 4 pin to 4 pin cable during DV dubbing i LINK and B are trademarks jeuonippy 123 Guide to Parts and Gontrol
286. ode page 33 DVD RW Format in Playable on most DVD RW Video mode players finalisation page 33 necessary page 41 DVD R Em Automatically formatted in Playable on most DVD VR mode players finalisation DVD R necessary page 41 DVD R DL RW VIDEO Format in VR mode page 33 Playable only on DVD R in VR Formatting is VR mode compatible players mode performed finalisation necessary using the Disc page 41 DVD R ze Information R4 7 display mode Playable discs Automatically formatted in Video mode Playable on most DVD players finalisation necessary page 41 Type Disc Logo Icon used in this manual Characteristics DVD VIDEO VIDEO Discs such as movies that can be purchased or rented This recorder also recognizes DVD RAMs and DVD R Dual Layer Video mode discs as DVD Video compatible discs If the DVD RAM has a removable cartridge remove the cartridge before playback DIGITAL VIDEO VIDEO CD VIDEO CDs or CD Rs CD RWs VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD format COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Music CDs or CD Rs CD RWs in music CD format DATA DVD DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD ROMs containing either JPEG image files or DivX video files DATA CD CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs containing either MP3 audio tracks JPEG image fil
287. oded with copyright protection technologies This product is designed to play back discs that conform to the Compact Disc CD standard Recently various music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies are being marketed by some record companies Please be aware that among those discs there are some that do not conform to the CD standard and may not be playable by this product gt continued 9 Note on DualDiscs A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which mates DVD recorded material on one side with digital audio material on the other side However since the audio material side does not conform to the Compact Disc CD standard playback on this product is not guaranteed Q Notes Some DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RAMs CD RWs CD Rs cannot be played on this recorder due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc or the characteristics of the recording device and authoring software The disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalised For more information see the operating instructions for the recording device You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same DVD RW To change the disc s format reformat the disc page 43 Note that the disc s contents will be erased after reformatting You cannot shorten the time required for recording even with high speed discs It is recommended that you use discs with For Video printed on their packaging You cannot add new
288. ollowing precautions which are common to both dubbing methods If you want to record from a digital video camera connected to the DV IN jack see DV Dubbing on page 91 To record from equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks see Recording from connected equipment without a timer on page 65 Before you start You cannot record both the main and sub sound on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs Video mode For bilingual programmes set Bilingual Recording of DVD Rec Settings to either Main default or Sub in the Recording setup page 107 The chapter marks in the dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title When Auto Chapter is set to On in the Recording setup page 107 chapter marks are automatically inserted at approximately 6 minute intervals Hints When you dub a Playlist title it is recorded as an Original title When dubbed from a DVD to the HDD the picture size and the sound types originally recorded are retained Rec Mode Conversion Dubbing HDD lt gt CUm leza Allows you to dub from the HDD to a DVD or vice versa in a dubbing mode that differs from the original recordings For example when you dub an HQ title data size is large in SP mode you can reduce the data size saving more titles using less space Select a mode different from the original recording in Dub Mode in the steps of Dubbin
289. ontains a Copy Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded The recorder continues to record but a blank screen will be recorded To lock the disc tray Child Lock You can lock the disc tray to prevent children from ejecting the disc When the recorder is turned on hold down M until LOCKED appears in the front panel display The amp open close button does not work while the Child Lock is set To unlock the disc tray hold down until UNLOCKED appears in the front panel display when the recorder is turned on One Touch Play If you use the SMARTLINK connection you can easily start playing Press C gt The recorder and your TV automatically turn on and the TV s input is switched to the recorder Playback starts automatically One Touch Menu If you use the SMARTLINK connection you can easily display the Title List Press TITLE LIST The recorder and your TV automatically turn on and the TV s input 15 switched to the recorder The Title List appears Hints You can also use the C gt button in step 3 page 66 to start playback Even if you select Factory Setup in the Others setup page 110 the Child Lock remains set 19u 65 yoeg e d gt continued 67 Playback options To check the position of the buttons below see the illustration on page 66 For MP3 JPEG or DivX operations see Playing MP3 Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files or DivX Video Files o
290. or or AV amplifier receiver This will enable you to listen to sound Speakers Rear L AV amplifier receiver Speakers with a decoder Front L Centre HDMI cord Coaxial digital cord not supplied not supplied DIGITAL OUT PEM DTS MPEG DOLBY DIGITAL COAXIAL _ OPTICAL to coaxial or optical HDMI digital input Optical digital cord not supplied to DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL 5 mi pul 28000 R AUDIO t 5 lo 0 ACIN coma omen T to HDMI OUT R AUDIO L VIDEO S VIDEO to LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L LINE 2 OUT yellow Signal flow yellow plug is used for video signals page 17 Digital audio input jack If your AV amplifier receiver has a Dolby Digital DTS or MPEG audio decoder and a digital input jack use this connection You can enjoy Dolby Digital 5 1ch DTS 5 1ch and MPEG audio 5 1ch surround effects 20 Step 5 Preparing the Remote You can control the recorder using the supplied remote Insert two R6 size AA batteries by matching the and ends the batteries to the markings inside the battery compartment When using the remote point it at the remote sensor on recorder Q Notes If the supplied re
291. order 1227 Additional Information 1 28 Tro bleshoofl g obe _______ taps 1 28 Self diagnosis Function When letters numbers appear in the display 1 30 Notes About This Recorder Ne 1 30 Specifications ___________ 1 30 ABOUt LIN E 1 30 Guide to Parts and Controls 1251 Language Code List 1 31 Arsa Code TD IE T NU NU TII 1 31 2 DISASSEMBLY 5 1 CASE BLOCK ASSEMBLY itis these etes 2 2 i uias 2 2 222 deo matta 24 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY 2 2 2 5 FL 166 BOARD FR 257 BOARD 2 4 0 6 MARDDISK SEC PION ao CAE 2 4 2 5 26 2 5 2 9 DND DLW teni det 2 6 POWER BLOCK es 2 6 dx 237 2 12 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION 2 9 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3 1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 1 3 0 AV 106 BLOCK DIAGRAM entente 223 3 3 RD 064 1 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 5 3 4 RD 064 2 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 5 3 5 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 9 4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS 4 1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 1 49 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS seca AE 4 3 AW ANGE OR wa ka KA 4 4 AV 10
292. ormatted in Video mode To format anew DVD R in VR mode format using the Disc Information display page 33 2 CPRM Content Protection for Recordable Media is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images Discs that cannot be recorded on 8 discs DVD R DL Dual Layer discs DVD RAMs Maximum recordable number of titles Disc Number of titles HDD 300 DVD RW DVD R 99 DVD RW DVD R 49 DVD R DL 49 The maximum length for one title is eight hours Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers Since this recorder plays DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed some playback features may not be available See the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs Region code DVD VIDEO only Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOS playback only labelled with identical region codes This system is used to protect copyrights DVD VIDEOs labelled on this recorder If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO the message Playback prohibited by region code will appear on the TV screen Depending on the DVD VIDEO no region code indication may be labelled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions Region code Music discs enc
293. orrectly with programmes broadcast from some stations If the broadcast system updates the Teletext information at the moment recording starts the title label may not correspond to the recorded programme In this case you may have to manually enter the correct title page 39 Glock Auto Adjust Auto Clock Set Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when programme position in your local area broadcasts a time signal 1 Select Clock in Basic and press ENTER 2 Select Auto Adjust and press ENTER Basic Clock Auto Adjust Present Time Sun Off 1 AAB 1 1 2006 0 00 3 Select On and press gt 4 Press 4 repeatedly until the programme position of the station that carries a time signal appears and press ENTER Basic Clock Auto Adjust On 1 AAB Present Time Sun 1 1 2006 0 00 If the recorder does not receive a time signal from any station Auto Adjust returns to Off automatically and the menu for setting the clock manually appears on the screen 4 3 Output This setting is effective only when you set Type of Video Output to 16 9 in the Video setup Adjust this setting to watch 4 3 aspect ratio signals If you can change the aspect ratio on your TV change the setting on your TV not this recorder Note that this setting is effective only for HDMI connection Full Select this when you can change the aspect
294. ot available in some areas Notes After pressing REC it may take a short while to start recording You cannot change the recording mode while recording If there is a power failure the programme you recording may be erased You cannot watch a PAY TV Canal Plus programme while recording another PAY TV Canal Plus programme To use the TV Direct Rec function you must first correctly set the recorder s clock Checking the disc status while recording You can check the recording information such as recording time or disc type Press DISPLAY during recording The recording information appears DVD RW SP 1 23 45 1 Disc type format 2 Recording status Recording mode 4 Recording time Press DISPLAY to turn off the display 1 8 Eight Basic Operations Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder 1 Inserting a Disc CUD DATA open close PO pyp 1 Press DVD 2 Press amp open close and place a disc on the disc tray Recording playing side facing down 3 Press amp open close to close the disc tray Wait until LOAD disappears from the front panel display Unused DVDs are formatted automatically For DVD RW discs DVD RWs are formatted in the recording format VR mode or Video mode set by Format DVD RW in the DVD setup For DVD R discs DVD Rs are auto
295. ot select S Video Easy Setup Audio Connection If you connected an AV amplifier receiver using either a digital optical or coaxial cord select Yes DIGITAL OUT and set the digital output signal page 104 3 Press ENTER when Finish appears Easy Setup is finished To receive Guide Plus system data your recorder must be turned off when not in use If your recorder is connected to a set top box receiver be sure to leave the set top box receiver turned on After initial setup it may take up to 24 hours to begin receiving TV programme listings To return to the previous step Press 8 RETURN Hints If your AV amplifier receiver has an MPEG audio decoder set MPEG to MPEG page 104 If you want to run Easy Setup again select Setup from SETUP in the System Menu page 111 To check the Command Mode for the recorder Press Bl on the recorder when the recorder is turned off The Command Mode for the recorder appears in the front panel display If the Command Mode for the recorder has not been changed set the Command Mode for the remote to the default setting of DVD3 If the Command Mode for the remote is changed to DVD1 or DVD2 you will be unable to operate this recorder Changing programme positions of the recorder using the remote You can change programme positions of the recorder using the number buttons Number buttons
296. otal DVD Playback 3 Total DVD Recording lt RETURN gt lt lt Error History gt gt lt RETURN gt lt RETURN gt Up or Down lt lt History Clear gt gt Execute History Clear Yes lt RETURN gt lt lt Factory Set up gt 1 NOR Factory Set up 2 S AND Factory Set up 3 HDD Data Factory Set up 4 DTT Factory Set up lt RETURN gt lt lt Device Check gt 1 EEPROM Check 2 Super AND Check 3 Video Dec Device Check 4 DDR Data Check 9 IT Setting lt RETURN gt lt lt HDD gt gt 1 Indcate ID 2 Performance Check 3 Write ID lt RETURN gt Bale 5 Factory Check 6 Write Registration Code lt lt G code OSD Setting Menu gt gt 1 G CODE 2 Show View 3 Video Plus 4 VCR Plus lt RETURN gt 6 2 Verifying version number of the respective software of the main unit Setting ON OFF of the PAL 100 white signal output Reading the accumulative operating hours of the drive Total power on hours Total DVD playback hours Total DVD recording hours Display format OO hours AA minutes Displaying the error history in the past in the error code Maximum 20 errors can be displayed Displaying history of the buttons pressed in the past Pressed buttons for 400 commands at a maximum be stored Clearing the Error History and the Command History Returning the Set Ups of various functions to de
297. p p Fig 7 9 10 Scart Video RGB Output R Check lt Purpose gt This check confirms that the RGB R signal output has the rated amplitude If this signal level is not correct brightness of the video signal will not be too dark or too thin when the Scart connector output signal is connected to a projector having Scart input Test point Scart Video output R connector terminated 756 Specification 700 mV 50 mVp p Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to OFF RGB OUT should be set to ON 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the R signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p Fig 7 10 11 ScartVideo RGB Output G Check Purpose This check confirms that G signal of the RGB video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the Scart connector output signal is connected to a projector having Scart input Test point Scart Video output connector pin terminated in 750 700 mV450 Check method Note COMPONENT OUT should be set to OFF RGB OUT should be set to ON 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 10096 color bars 2 Confirm that signal level is 700 50 mVp p 700 50 mVp p Fig 7 11 12 ScartVideo RGB Output B Check Purpose This check confirms that the B signal of the RGB video conforms to the PAL standar
298. possible damage to the audio system the consumer should take proper precautions when the LINE1 TV LINE 3 DECODER LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks of the recorder are connected to an amplification system To enjoy DTS Digital Surround playback an external DTS decoder must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of the recorder Set the sound to Stereo using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD page 68 Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack When you play DVD with DTS sound tracks set DTS to On in the Audio setup page 104 Adjusting the picture quality HDD EXT SUW KB H DivX video file only 1 Press OPTIONS during playback to select Video Settings and press ENTER Video Settings Select the item you want to change Sharpness Off PB Video Equalizer Playing from the beginning of the programme you are recording Chasing Playback Chasing Playback allows you to view the recorded part of a programme while the recording is being made Y ou do not need to wait until the recording finishes Press OPTIONS while recording to select Chasing Playback and press ENTER Playback starts from the beginning of the programme you are recording When you fast forward to the point that you are recording Chasing Playback
299. ppear in the display When the self diagnosis function is activated to prevent the recorder from malfunctioning a five character service number e g C 13 00 with a combination of a letter and four numbers appears in the front panel display In this case check the following table First three Cause and or corrective characters of action the service number C 13 There is a problem in the HDD gt Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized service facility The DVD is dirty gt Clean the disc with a soft cloth C 31 The DVD CD is not inserted correctly gt Re insert the disc correctly E XX To prevent a malfunction the xx is a number recorder has performed the self diagnosis function gt Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and give the five character service number Example E 61 10 Inputs and outputs LINE 2 OUT AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms 10 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 2 IN AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms more than 22 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 1 TV 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB OUT upstream LINE 3 DECODER 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB IN S Video OUT downstream Decoder DV IN 4 pin i LINK S100 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL Optical output jack 18 dBm wave length 660 nm DIGITAL OUT
300. ppears Example Rec NR Rec Mode Selects the recording mode for the desired recording time and picture quality For more information see Recording mode on page 54 3 Press the green button Edit Please enter the recording date and press the green button to confirm 215 Search My TV Schedule Record Schedule Media Freg Mode 25 May Friends HDD Daily EP 25 May Travel DVD Once HQ inthe column select an item using the red button Back or the green button Next and adjust using the number buttons or 4 4 gt You can change the date start time stop time programme position or input source The cursor moves to the right column 5 Press the corresponding colour button repeatedly to change settings Red button Media Sets the recording destination to either HDD or DVD Green button Selects the recording pattern The item changes as follows Once Daily Mon Fri Monday to Friday Mon Sat Monday to Saturday Sun every Sunday Sat every Saturday Once Yellow button Mode Selects the recording mode page 54 Press gt to display Extend Time C Press the yellow button Extend Time repeatedly to select the duration time or to set the PDC VPS function The item changes as fol
301. r if the 16 9 signal cannot be recorded as 16 9 it is recorded as 4 3 When playing a 16 9 size picture recorded as 4 3 the image is fixed to 4 3 Letter Box regardless of the setting in Type of Video setup page 101 Remnants of images may appear on your screen when using NR Video Equalizer does not affect the input of the DV IN jack and does not work with RGB signals Creating chapters in a title The recorder can automatically divide a recording a title into chapters by inserting chapter marks at approximately 6 minute intervals during recording To disable this function set Auto Chapter in the Recording setup to Off page 107 When recording to the HDD a DVD R VR mode or a DVD RW VR mode you can insert and erase chapter marks manually page 81 Q Note When dubbing page 85 the chapter marks in the dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title Cancelling timer settings 1 with the GUIDE Plus system turned off press SCHEDULE The SCHEDULE list appears 2 Select the timer setting you want to cancel using 4 9 3 Press the red button Delete To close the SCHEDULE list Press TV GUIDE or SCHEDULE When the timer settings overlap The programme that starts first has priority and the second programme starts recording only after the first programme has finished 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 When the recordings start at same time The p
302. r supply input Analog _ Fami WS _ TESTMODS O Fear LAB O o Notme SSS S DADRSS O Oupurof addres SforSDRAM _ Lam voas Powersupply input 2399 _ LAB O OuputofaddressTforSDRAM _ DADRSS Output ofaddress DADRSII2 Ouputofaddres 2forSDRAM _ ws Caci mo ol aci VR la _ VSSAADIOB Tact Power supply _ ACE VSSDDAIA beam AG Power supply OV _ Cacio VSSDDAIB Digt GND O __ 6 DiiwGND TESTMODIG O Digia GN Input of digital video signal 1 Pacis ol 2 Pacis O Input of digital video signal 7 Pacis DADRSH O OupuofakmssifrSDRAM S Pacis DADRSIGI Output ofaddess 6 forSDRAM SSS LACH O Oupuofaddres for SDRAM _ Laco vss bi GND Dac PADRSUI O _ pwe OwpwofwieemblesgmlfrSDRAM _ AC24 VDD25 Power supply input Digital 2 5V EVEN
303. ratio on your TV Normal Select this when you cannot change the aspect ratio on your TV Shows a 4 3 size video with the aspect ratio as it is 16 9 aspect ratio TV Component Out Selects whether or not to output video signals from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks Outputs the component video signals Select this when you want to view progressive signals Outputs no signals Q Notes When you set Linel Output of Scart Setting to RGB you cannot set Component Out to On When you connect the recorder to a monitor or projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks do not select Off If you select Off in this case the picture may not appear Hint If you set Auto Adjust to the Auto Clock Set function is activated whenever the recorder is turned off Note The Auto Clock Set function does not work while the recorder is standing by for Synchro Recording To set the clock manually If the Auto Clock Set function did not set the clock correctly for your local area try another station for the Auto Clock Set function or set the clock manually 1 Select Clock in Basic and press ENTER 2 Select Auto Adjust and press ENTER Basic Clock 1 1 1 2006 0 00 Auto Adjust Present Time Sun 3 Select Off and press ENTER 4 Select Present Time and press ENTER
304. rc p CGND ti 1 8 SCALB H 0 oy SCALB3 i 03 SCALB2 on SCALB1 SCALBO DO DE U 1608 S 1608 GND lt UNSW6V IC904 HDMI TX 1904 SII9036CTU 1 1 AGND HH XC XC AGND EXT_SWING 24 PVCC1 PGND1 RSVDL ADATAOH gt ADATAOH ALRCKOH ALRCKOH ABCKOH gt INT 2 INT 2 lt CTS 3 RTS 3 CTS 3 R1964 R985 P30 AN00 CK 4 P31 ANO1 SDA R1962 0 4 7k HCS 2 gt SCLK 2 HDREQ 1 gt JL930 R983 0 FL902 l C903 C912 P32 AN02 TRAP2 9 P33 AN03 XPWDN 3 P34 AN 16903 SUB CPU cz XSMCS PO1 INTO1 TXINT PO2 INTO2 RTS 2 RX 3 Ww JL931 R919 5901 10903 MB95F108ASPFV GE1 5G00 3 3 HDCP SDA P66 SOT P43 AN11 HDCP WP P67 SIN AND GATE RYT R 78 CTS 3 TX 3 gt SCLK 3 gt 4 39 2 co 92 GND 3 3V XEXRST LON 3 2 2 5 2 5 5 NOT USE sone
305. receiver and contact your cable or satellite company to see if they can provide you with a compatible set top box receiver Notes The list of external receivers controllable by the GUIDE Plus system is updated constantly and is distributed through GUIDE Plus system data signals Since the time your recorder has been produced and the time you installed your recorder for the first time new external receiver codes might have been added If the external receiver is still not on the list or is not controlled properly by the recorder please call Customer Support to report the brand and model of your external receiver 2 Press ENTER Follow the on screen instructions to make the following settings Easy Setup OSD Select a language for the on screen displays Easy Setup Tuner System Select your country region or language The programme position order will be set according to the country region you set set the programme positions manually see page 96 f you live in a French speaking country that is not listed on the display select ELSE English Easy Setup Postal Code Enter your postal code using the number buttons or TN gt and press ENTER To erase a number move the cursor to the number and press 8 4 RETURN Note that the option for entering your Postal Code only appears if you select one of the following tuner systems in the step above UK B NL E I CH A Ea
306. recorder to the aerial output programme position on the cable box Place the set top box controller near the remote sensor on the top box receiver Set top box y I controller Set top box page 13 5 not supplied Aerial cable supplied to AERIAL IN to G LINK AERIAL DVD recorder to AERIAL OUT to aerial input N Signal flow Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connection 14 Step 1 Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Gontroller Select one of the following aerial hookups Do NOT set Line3 Input of the Scart Setting to zam Decoder in the Video setup page 103 when making connection A B If you have Hookup 5 Set top box receiver with an aerial output or aerial and SCART A page 14 output 2 Set top box receiver with a SCART output only B page 15 e No set top box receiver C page 16 If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals This recorder accepts RGB signals If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals connect the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 3 DECODER jack and set Input of Scart Setting to Video RGB in the Video setup page 103 Note that this connection and setup disable the SMARTLINK function If you want to use the SMARTLINK function wit
307. recordings to DVD Rs DVD Rs or DVD RWs Video mode that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment In some cases you may not be able to add new recordings to DVD RWs that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment If you do add a new recording note that this recorder will rewrite the DVD menu You cannot edit recordings on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs that are made on other DVD equipment If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this recorder the data may be erased You may not be able to record on some recordable discs depending on the disc 11 Hookups and Settings Hooking Up the Recorder Follow steps 1 through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder Do not connect the mains lead until you reach Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead on page 21 Q Notes See Specifications page 121 for a list of supplied accessories Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting 12 A Connecting a set top box receiver using an aerial cable or an aerial cable and a SCART cord With this hookup you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver To watch cable programmes you need to match the programme position on the
308. rogramme that is set last has priority In this example timer setting B is set after A so the first part of timer setting A will not be recorded 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 When the end time of one recording and the start time of another are the same After finishing the previous recording the other recording may be delayed 7 00 9 00 10 00 Note When PDC VPS is set to for one or more timer recordings the start times may change in the event of a broadcast delay or early start Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings HDD EUD EW Em Er You can change or cancel timer settings using the SCHEDULE list Number buttons Colour buttons C5 TV GUIDE SCHEDULE ey OPTIONS Changing timer settings 1 with the GUIDE Plus system turned off press SCHEDULE The SCHEDULE list appears BBC2 25 May 10 10 VIDEO Plus Manual Home Schedule displays programmes you ve Set to Record Press to use Press the green button for manual recording Press 4 to view and P to view a Grid Search My TV Schedule Media Freq Mode HDD Daily DVD Once HQ Record Schedule 25 May Friends 25 May Travel 2 Select the timer setting you want to change using 4 9 gt continued 61
309. rt number specified 00 5 4 am oO OLO Or gt 1608 1102 4 7uH SB C155 41 16V T C130 C131 C135 C107 C108 C125 C159 C160 C129 C127 0 1 0 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 B B 16V 16V 10V 10V 10V 10V 6 3 6 3 6 3V 16V POWER 4 5 4 6 AV 106 1 8 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 9 10 CN502 42 SPDIFO JL539 1 06 BOARD 2 8 NO MARK REC PB MODE XLMUTE ES AUDIO IN C213 gt SPD_GND A R218 R223 U REF NO 10 000 SERIES 224 10k S an AUGND 0 5 0 5 EU AU OUT R gt gt 7 gt AW gt ae c c AINL AOUTR AINL AOUTR R226 R227 9 TO 7 8 4700 4700 AOUTR EU AU OUT L 22 gt N E NO lt gt 8 NO W 4 NN WY EE d 3 0 596 gt E 188 gt zaj SWA 8V AUGND 1 AOUTR HM PE 3 UG AOUTR gt 14 AINR OOD UE POE AOUTR 15 AOUTL AOUTR AS gt JL546 AOUTL ES SS Ez 16 AINR 98 C211 AOUTL 2 JL541 a E E 755 S S AOUTL 7118 AUGND XRMUTE AOUTL 19 XRMUTE RD 064 SP
310. s greyscale JPEG image files 4 1 1 JPEG image files When you attempt to play a broken file or a file that does not satisfy the play conditions RJ appears but the recorder cannot play the file The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of size more than 720 width x 576 height 4 GB The display for entering the number appears Example Title Search Title 21 The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles tracks etc 2 Press the number buttons to select the number of the title chapter track time code etc you want For example Time Search To find a scene at 2 hours 10 minutes and 20 seconds enter 21020 If you make a mistake select another number 3 Press ENTER The recorder starts playback from the selected number Q Note Title Search is not applicable to the HDD About MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files MP3 is an audio compression technology that satisfies certain ISO MPEG regulations JPEG is an image compression technology You can play MP3 MPEGI Audio Layer 3 format audio tracks and JPEG image files on DATA CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs or JPEG image files on DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DATA CDs and DATA DVDs must be recorded according to ISO9660 Level 1 Level 2 or Joliet format for the recorder to recognize the DivX video files and JPEG image files DATA CDs must be recorded according to 1509660
311. s For more information see the pages in parentheses Remote 1 Vo 3 DOODO 2 000 4 9 Gl 000 7 8 9 lt 10 11 12 13 15 14 4 16 17 19 18 20 GEE e 20 21 21 23 O 22 24 MO 26 28 27 ESEE 1 HDD button 33 DVD button 33 2 on standby button 25 3 open close button 33 4 PROG programme buttons 33 The button has a tactile dot 5 Number buttons 57 72 The number 5 button has a tactile dot 6 INPUT SELECT button 65 91 7 AUDIO button 68 The AUDIO button has a tactile dot 8 SUBTITLE button 68 9 MENU Green button 66 124 Front panel display 11 2 1 55 2 VGD 8 1 HDD DVD indicators Displays the selected media and the playing recording status 2 Dubbing direction indicator 3 SMARTLINK indicator 18 4 Displays the following Playing time Current title chapter track index number Recording time recording mode Displays DATA CDs as CD TV DVD button 22 11 TOP MENU Red button 66 12 CHAPTER MARK Yellow button 81 CHAPTER MARK ERASE Blue button 81 SYSTEM MENU button 94 96 TITLE LIST button 35 66 78 TV GUIDE button 45 INFO information button 45 15 SCHEDULE button 57 lt
312. sc space was not enough gt The PDC VPS function is working Contents previously recorded were erased gt Data that is not playable on this recorder but was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be erased from the disc when the disc is inserted gt Auto Title Erase of the Timer Settings in the Recording setup is set to page 107 The PDC VPS function does not operate gt Check that the clock and date are set correctly gt Checkthat the PDC VPS time you setis the correct one there might be a mistake in the TV programme guide If the broadcast you wanted to record did not send the good PDC VPS information the recorder will not start recording gt Ifthe reception is poor the PDC VPS signal might be altered and the recorder might not start recording PDC VPS Scan Off is selected page 62 The PDC VPS function may not work if the GUIDE Plus host channel setup is not complete gt The PDC VPS function does not work when the GUIDE Plus data is being downloaded Recording from the equipment with a timer Nothing was recorded even though you set the Synchro Rec setting correctly gt You forgot to turn off the connected equipment Turn off the connected equipment and set the recorder Synchro Rec standby mode page 63 gt The recorder was not set to the Synchro Recording standby mode Press gt 6 SYNCHRO REC to have the recorder stand by for recording
313. selected dubbing mode the following display appears after step 12 DV Dubbing There is not enough memory The dubbing mode will be adjusted Do you want to continue Select OK and go to step 12 If you do not want to change the dubbing mode select Cancel However note that dubbing will end before the title 15 finished Q Notes If you set the beginning of the tape as the IN point and the end point as the OUT point the IN and OUT points may move slightly during dubbing You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one second Buiqqng 93 95 96 98 Settings and Adjustments Aerial Reception and Language Settings Basic The setup helps you to make tuner clock and programme position settings for the recorder 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select SETUP and press ENTER 3 Select Basic and press ENTER The Basic setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined To turn off the display press S YSTEM MENU repeatedly SETUP Basic Programme Setting Video Programme Sort Audio TV Guide Page Recording Clock DVD OSD Others English Easy Setup Programme Setting Presets programme positions manually If some programme positions could not be set using the Easy Setup function you can set them manually If t
314. selected title To use the DVD s Menu When you play a DVD VIDEO or a finalised DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode you can display the disc s menu by pressing TOP MENU or MENU To play VIDEO CDs with PBC functions PBC Playback Control allows you to play VIDEO CDs interactively using the menu on your TV screen When you start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC functions the menu appears Select an item using the number buttons and press ENTER Then follow the instructions in the menu press gt when Press SELECT appears The PBC function of Super VIDEO CDs does not work with this recorder Super VIDEO CDs are played in continuous play mode only To change the angles If various angles multi angles for a scene are recorded on the disc appears in the front panel display Press OPTIONS during playback to select Change Angle and press ENTER To stop playback Press M To playback quickly with sound Scan Audio When you press gt gt during playback of a title recorded in the HDD you can play quickly with dialogue or sound 1 3 appears No sound is output when you press P two or more times to change search speed 1 16 Recording from connected equipment without a timer You can record from a connected VCR or similar device To connect a VCR or similar device see Connecting a VCR or Similar Device on page 28 Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the eq
315. ssis section 1 See 8 2 8 3 p NY Da A Q 9 supplied Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks A 1209 198 A CASE BLOCK ASSY SERVICE USE 3 076 563 11 SCREW SPECIAL FRONT POINT 1 479 557 11 REMOTE COMMANDER RM T D231P HX825 1 479 558 11 REMOTE COMMANDER RM T D230P HX820 2 658 476 01 COVER BATTERY FOR RMT D230P D231P 3 070 883 61 SCREW TAPPING 8 1 8 1 2 CHASSIS SECTION 1 not supplied A Chassis section 2 See page 8 3 Ref No Part No Description Remarks 51 3 088 023 01 B3 3 52 3 077 331 31 BV3 3 CR 53 3 077 331 01 BV3 3 54 A 1494 643 A RD 064 BOARD COMPLETE SERVICE HX820 54 A 1215 024 A RD 064 BOARD COMPLETE SERVICE HX825 8 2 8 1 3 5 515 SECTION 2 supplied not supplied not supplied supplied 102 not supplied not supplied 101 9 supplied 4 2 not supplied not supplied Sa dz Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks 101 3 077 331 01 BV3 3 CR 107 1 833 388 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FAR 005 102 3 087 675 01 6 32UNCX5 108 1 787 291 11 FAN D C A 103 1219 462 HDD SATA WD 160GB E ASSY SERVICE 109 3 077 331 31 BV3 3 CR 104 1 797 413 11 DRIVE DVD DRW V35A 110 3 088 023 01 B3 3 CR 105 1 833 383 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FRD 011 ATU401 8 597 559
316. st channel has changed or moved the programme guide data cannot be received In this case follow the steps in Searching for the GUIDE Plus host channel page 51 to update the host channel setting If the problem still persists after waiting for a day search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually page 52 www europe guideplus com The programme position number in the programme listing does not match the broadcast station gt There may be more than one channel lineup for your area To change the channel lineup select Editor in the Menu Bar of the GUIDE Plus system page 52 Programme listings for some programme positions are missing gt The programme guide data may not be updated Turn off the recorder and let the recorder receive the programme guide data gt Some broadcast stations support only two days of data For details see the following website www europe guideplus com gt All of the GUIDE Plus data could not be received because the reception is poor The programme listing is not up to date gt The recorder was in use during the time that the GUIDE Plus data was scheduled to be downloaded gt All of the GUIDE Plus data could not be received because the reception is poor Sound There is no sound Re connect all connections securely gt The connecting cord is damaged gt The input source setting on the amplif
317. st number in the title list Largest title number 1 1 4 7GB Thu 20 4 2006 13 00 0H30M LSP 0 968 11 Travel 10 4 2006 21 00 0H30M ESP 0 3GB 10 Mystery Sun 2 4 2006 9 00 1H00M 0 8GB For the HDD and DVD RWs VR mode you can erase any title For DVD Rs and DVD Rs the available disc space does not increase even if you erase titles See Erasing and Editing a Title on page 78 or Erasing multiple titles Erase Titles on page 79 To switch between the Playlist and Original Title List You can display the Playlist titles in the Title List Playlist or the Original titles in the Title List Original To switch the two Title Lists press while a Title List is displayed To create and edit a Playlist see page 81 Erasing and Editing a Title HDD CUS EUM CUTS ENS Em ET This section explains the basic edit functions Note that editing is irreversible To edit the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode without changing the original recordings create a Playlist title page 81 CHAPTER e MARK 22 CHAPTER ERASE MARK test Tx ENTER d RETURN OPTIONS 444 Im 1 Press TITLE LIST For HDD titles or DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode press amp w9 to switch the Title Lists if necessary 2 Select a title and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Sele
318. sy Setup Clock The recorder will automatically search foraclock signal If a clock signal cannot be found set the clock manually using lt 4 and press ENTER Easy Setup TV Type page 101 If you have a wide screen TV select 16 9 If you have a standard TV select either 4 3 Letter Box shrink to fit or 4 3 Pan Scan stretch to fit This will determine how wide screen images are displayed on your TV Easy Setup Component Out If you are using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jack select Easy Setup Line3 Input If you plan to connect a decoder such as a PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder to the LINE 3 DECODER jack select Yes pue sdnyooy gt continued 25 To fix the top box controller to your set top box receiver Once you have confirmed that the set top box controller controls your set top box receiver fix it in place 1 Remove the backing on the double sided tape 2 Attach it so that the set top box controller is directly above the remote control sensor on your set top box receiver pue sdnyooy 21 Connecting VGR or Similar Device After disconnecting the recorder s mains lead from the mains connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack i LINK jack page 91 For details refer to the
319. t excessive dust or mechanical shock Do not place the recorder in an inclined position It is designed to be operated in a horizontal position only Keep the recorder and discs away from equipment with strong magnets such as microwave ovens or large loudspeakers Do not place heavy objects on the recorder On recording Make trial recordings before making the actual recording On compensation for lost recordings Sony is not liable and will not compensate for any lost recordings or relevant losses including when recordings are not made due to reasons including recorder failure or when the contents of a recording are lost or damaged as a result of recorder failure or repair undertaken to the recorder Sony will not restore recover or replicate the recorded contents under any circumstances gt continued 3 10 Quick Guide to Disc Types Recordable and playable discs DVD ReWritable VR mode Icon used in Formatting Compatibility with other DVD Type this manual new discs players finalising Hard disk drive Formatting Dub HDD contents to a DVD internal DD unnecessary to play on other DVD players RW Automatically DVD ReWritable formatted in Playable on DVD RW DVD RW RW VR mode compatible players 1 DVD RW automatically finalised Playable only on VR mode compatible players finalisation unnecessary Format in VR m
320. t host channel setting is set to Automatic so you should not have to change the host channel setting However if the host channel has changed or moved update the host channel setting If you made connection according to Connecting a set top box receiver using a SCART cord only page 15 see Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually on page 52 1 2 Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system appears Select Setup in the Menu Bar The GUIDE Plus setup menu appears Select Host Channel Setup using and press ENTER Press the yellow button Reset Press 1 to turn off the recorder Wait for a day until the programme guide data can be received If the programme guide data has not been received after waiting for a day search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually page 52 www europe guideplus com SN d 30109 gt continued 51 52 54 Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually If you are using connection B page 15 and you want to receive the programme guide data from your set top box receiver search for the host channel on the following website and set it for your area following the steps below www europe guideplus com 1 Press TV GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system appears Select Setup in the Menu Bar GUIDE Plus setup menu appears 2
321. ted in it the CD can be ejected However if you close the tray while it is empty there can be a case that ejection of the tray becomes impossible Note3 Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remains under the state as described above the situation cannot be improved 2 If the tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted Execute the forced ejection Insert a DVD ROM DVD test disc DVD software available on the market or the like on the tray and try to close the tray There are cases that it recovers the trouble 3 Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media DVD RW R can be damaged There be a case that initialization is also impossible 2 BOARDS CONNECTION Connector Connector CN606 42P 603 42P RD 064 board RD51 RD relay board J 6090 167 A RD51 AV extension flexible flat cable 6090 168 RD51 AV relay board 6090 169 2 Connector CN502 42P p Connector CN501 42P RDR HX820 HX825 SECTION 1 GENERAL This section is extracted from instruction manual RDR HX825 2 886 040 E1 1 WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only The mains lead must be changed only at a qualified service shop CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 7541 LF
322. the scene is correct If the scene is incorrect press 11 119 to select the scene you want to set for a thumbnail picture and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation To change the thumbnail press Select OK and press ENTER The scene is set for the title s thumbnail picture Note Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed correctly Checking the remaining disc space You can check the remaining disc space using the Disc Information display 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 2 Press OPTIONS to select Disc Information and press ENTER The Disc Information display appears Available settings differ depending on the disc type Example When a DVD RW is inserted Disc Information Media DVD RW Close Disc Name Disc 13 10 2006 28 10 2006 Finalise Title no 3 HQ 0H30M HSP 0H45M SP 1H00M LSP 1H15M ESP 1H30M LP 2 00 EP 3H00M SLP 4HOOM Format Remainder 2 3 4 7GB Remainder approximate The remaining recording time in each of the recording modes Disc space bar Remaining disc space total disc space Hint To increase disc space see open up disc space page 78 change to the first scene of the recording title After dubbing the title thumbnail picture set on the source recording is c
323. the screen may be hidden or displayed with black bands or the left and right sides of the image may flicker In this case change the settings on your TV not on this recorder Depending on the connected equipment the video signals of the selected HDMI resolution may not be output gt When connecting the DVI equipment 720 480 576 video signals are output even when an option other than 720x480 576p is selected gt When connecting the DVI equipment and a PC monitor that is HDCP compliant only 720 480 576 video signals may be output TV programme reception does not fill the screen gt Set the channel manually in Programme Setting in the Basic setup page 96 gt Select the correct source using the INPUT SELECT button or select a channel of any TV programme using the PROG buttons No sound is output from the HDMI OUT jack gt Try the following the recorder off and on again Turn the connected equipment off and on again S Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cord again gt The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI device DVI jacks do not accept audio signals gt The equipment connected to the HDMI OUT jack does not conform to the audio signal format in this case set Audio HDMI of Audio Connection to PCM in the Audio setup page 105 Sound distortion occurs gt Set Audio ATT in the Audio setup to page 104
324. title or track by entering its number You can also search for a scene using the time code Number buttons 0000 ENTER OPTIONS 1 Press OPTIONS during playback to select a search method and press ENTER Search for DVDs Chapter Search for HDD DVDs Track Search for CDs DATA CDs Search for VIDEO CDs Album Search for DVDs DATA CDs Time Search for HDD DVDs DATA DVDs DATA CDs Searches for a starting point by entering the time code DivX video file only File Search for DATA DVDs DATA CDs To rotate a picture Press OPTIONS while the JPEG image is displayed to select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and press ENTER Hints Press AUDIO to switch between stereo or monaural audio tracks when playing MP3 audio tracks You can change the audio track when playing MP3 or MPEG audio of DivX video files using the AUDIO button You can display subtitles when playing DivX video files using the SUBTITLE button You can rotate a JPEG image using lt gt buttons when the image is displayed Q Notes Some JPEG files especially files of three million pixels or more may lengthen the slideshow interval Rotated JPEG images will not be saved when you switch to another folder Images larger than 720 x 480 will be reduced to 720 x 480 when displayed The following images are not displayed progressive JPEG image file
325. tted line with mark A are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 8 20E RDR HX820 HX825 Sony Corporation 9 883 932 11 Home Electronics Network Company 2 e 54 Am Published by Quality Assurance Dept
326. uipment has a DV output jack i LINK jack Press HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a recordable DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc page 33 2 Press INPUT SELECT to select an input source according to the connection you made The front panel display changes as follows programme position L1 gt L2 gt L3 gt DV 3 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Press OPTIONS to select Line Audio Input and press ENTER Then select Bilingual and press ENTER For details about bilingual recording see page 55 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode For details about the recording mode see page 54 5 Insert the source tape into the connected equipment and set to playback pause 6 Press REC This recorder starts recording To resume playback from the point where you stopped Resume Play When you press C gt again after you stop playback the recorder resumes playback from the point where you pressed To start from the beginning press OPTIONS to select Play Beginning and press ENTER Playback starts from the beginning of the title track scene The point where you stopped playing is cleared when you open the disc tray except for HDD you play another title except for HDD you switch the Title List menu to Original or Playlist HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode only you
327. ul not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor be cause it is damaged by the heat All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B unless otherwise noted non flammable resistor fusible resistor panel designation internal component adjustment for repair IN OUT direction of B line B Line B Line Circled numbers refer to waveforms Voltages are dc between measurement point and ground Readings are taken with a color bar signals on DVD reference disc Readings are taken with a digital multimeter DC 10MW Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark A are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified When indicating parts by reference number please include the board name WAVEFORMS AV 106 R D 064 4 9 WAVEFORMS AV 106 BOARD RD 064 BOARD 0 X602 7 703 COMPONENT PR 0 201 yr 100 5 47 40 5 3 J702 S VIDEO 4 4 RDR HX820 HX825 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 43 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AV 106 BOARD 1 8 10 14 REF NO 10 000 S
328. up you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position on the recorder DVD recorder AERIAL to AERIAL OUT Aerial cable supplied c Signal flow SCART input jack When you set Easy Setup Line Output to 5 Video or RGB page 25 use a SCART cord that conforms to the selected signal Q Video input jack You will enjoy standard quality images Q S VIDEO input jack You will enjoy high quality images Q Component video input jacks Y Pn Cn You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and high quality images If your TV accepts progressive 525p 625p format signals use this connection and set Component Out in the Video setup to On page 102 Then set Progressive Output to On in the Video setup to send progressive video signals For details see Progressive Output on page 102 HDMI input jack Use a certified HDMI cord not supplied to enjoy high quality digital picture and sound through the HDMI OUT jack When playing wide screen images Some recorded images may not fit your TV screen To change the picture size see page 101 If you are connecting to a VCR Connect your VCR to the LINE 3 DECODER jack on the recorder page 28 to aerial input TV Notes Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the sa
329. ur digital video camera and prepare for recording Select and edit the scenes you want to dub Using the recorder s remote control fast forward or rewind the tape to select the scenes At this point the selected scenes are not copied to the disc The recorder only remembers the IN and OUT points of the scenes that you selected for dubbing You can also erase or change the order of the scenes Dub the selected scenes After you have selected the scenes the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape automatically and record the scenes to the HDD or a DVD How chapters are created The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD become a single title When Chapter is set to in the Recording setup this title is divided into chapters When dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode each shooting session on the tape and each selected scene becomes a chapter on the disc For other discs the recorder divides the title into chapters at approximately 6 minute intervals 1 Follow steps 1 to 6 of Preparing for DV dubbing on page 91 and press SYSTEM MENU Q Notes You cannot connect more than one piece of digital video equipment to the recorder You cannot control the recorder using another device or another recorder of the same model You cannot record date time or the contents of the cassette memory onto the disc If you record from a DV Digital8 format tape that
330. vent such as alcohol or benzine On cleaning discs disc lens cleaners Do not use cleaning discs or disc lens cleaners including wet or spray types These may cause the recorder to malfunction Supplied accessories Mains lead 1 Aerial cable 1 Remote commander remote 1 Set top box controller 1 R6 size AA batteries 2 Specifications and design are subject to change without notice Compatible colour systems This recorder is designed to record using the PAL colour system and play back using the PAL or NTSC colour systems The signals of the SECAM colour system can be received or recorded but played back in the PAL colour system only Recording of video sources based on other colour systems cannot be guaranteed 1 30 Notes about the discs To keep the disc clean handle the disc by its edge Do not touch the surface Dust fingerprints or scratches on the disc may cause it to malfunction Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car After playing store the disc in its case Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth Wipe the disc from the centre out Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner commercially available cleaners or anti static spray intended for vinyl LPs Do not use the following discs Adisc that has a non standard shape e
331. whether or not the recorder is turned on You can turn off the recorder without affecting the recording even after recording starts Q Note To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 41 Like the standard x3 recording modes of video tapes you can select the desired recording mode using the REC MODE button Recording modes with higher quality provide a more beautiful recording but the large data volume also results in a shorter recording time Conversely a longer duration provides a longer recording time but the lower data volume results in a coarser picture quality To cancel the settings Press the red button Back To return to the Home position Press the blue button The cursor returns to the home position on the Grid To check the GUIDE Plus system information 1 Press TV GUIDE elect Setup the Menu Bar 2 Select Setup in the Menu Bar and press ENTER 3 Select GUIDE Plus system Information using 44 and press ENTER Checking programme positions Check whether programme position numbers are the same as the programme position numbers set in the Programme Setting If you want to make adjustments to the channel settings or change the channel name see Programme Setting in Settings and Adjustments page 96 1 Select Editor in the Menu Bar 8802 25 10 10 Editor displays your channel settings You may
332. x gt The DATA CD DivX video DATA DVD DivX video is not created in a DivX format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1 Level 2 or Joliet gt The DivX video file is larger than 720 width x 576 height The MP3 audio tracks do not play gt The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play page 73 The JPEG image files do not play gt The JPEG image files are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play page 73 gt Progressive JPEG images cannot be played TV Pause does not work gt You are recording to the HDD or the HDD is full Recording Timer recording Editing The programme position cannot be changed from the programme position you are recording gt Set the TV s input source to Recording does not start immediately after you press 6 REC gt Operate the recorder only after LOAD FORMAT or INFOWRITE disappears from the front panel display Nothing was recorded even though you set the timer setting correctly gt There was a power failure during recording gt The internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour Reset the clock page 100 gt The channel was disabled after the timer recording was set See Programme Setting on page 96 gt The programme position was hidden after the timer recording was set See Making changes to the GUIDE Plus
333. y monaural sound connect to just the L MONO and VIDEO input jacks on the front of the recorder Do not connect the R input jack Q Notes Do not connect the yellow LINE IN VIDEO jack when using an S video cord Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment s input jack with the other equipment s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder This may cause noise feedback Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time 29 4 Select Scart Setting and press ENTER Setting PAY TV Canal Plus analogue programme positions Line1 Output Line3 Input Line3 Output To watch or record PAY TV Canal Plus idee deg has E analogue programmes set your recorder to Video Decoder Video receive the programme positions using the Video RG Sides In order to set the programme positions RGB Decoder Video 3 correctly be sure to follow all of the steps below Press to select Video or RGB for Line1 Output Decoder for Line3 Input and Video for Line3 Output and press ENTER Number The Video displ buttons e Video setup display appears again 6 Press 4 RETURN to return the cursor to the left column MENU S 7 Select Basic and press ENTER S 9 4 et SETUP ENTER RETURN SED Basic gt Progr
334. you want to record and turn it off T Press gt SYNCHRO REC The SYNCHRO REC indicator lights up on the front panel The recorder is ready to start Synchro Recording The recorder automatically starts recording when it receives an input signal from the connected equipment The recorder stops recording when the connected equipment turns off To stop recording Press REC STOP gt SYNCHRO REC To cancel Synchro Rec Press gt SYNCHRO REC The SYNCHRO REC indicator on the recorder turns off Playback Playing HDD Number MENU a5 MENU TITLE LIST gt 3 4 t4 ENTER PAER CY OPTIONS 44 e me gt gt 44415 9 irr 959 1 Press HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a disc see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 33 If you insert a DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD DATA DVD or DATA CD press D gt Playback starts 2 Press TITLE LIST For details about the Title List see 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List on page 35 Example DVD RW TLE List 1 1 4 7GB 12 Tennis Thu 20 4 2006 13 00 LSP 0 9GB 11 Travel AN Mon 10 4 2006 21 00 0H30M 0 3GB 10 Mystery Sun 2 4 2006 9 00 1H00M SLP 0 8GB Notes starts recording only after detecting a special control signal from the connected equipment The beginning o

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ES FR DE EN NL  MidiIllustrator User Manual Version 3  Meaco 20L medium home dehumidifier Instruction  Module de création de maquette Postréponse : Mode d`emploi  Samsung 22" LED monitor koos Touch of Colori disainiga (must) Kasutusjuhend  Universal Summit Sprühdüsen  Mounting and Operating instructions  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file